JP6392284B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly, to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As such a gaming machine, after a character as a suggestion image that suggests a change in hold is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, an action effect that acts on the hold display is executed to display the hold display. There was a thing which changed a display mode (patent documents 1).

JP 2014-79524 A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the character itself as the suggestion image for performing the hold change does not change, and thus is not interesting.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game in the process before the execution of the action effect.

(Means 1) The gaming machine of the present invention
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous for a player,
Specific display means (such as the production control microcomputer 100, the processing of S707 in FIG. 10) capable of displaying a specific display (pending display, active display, etc.) for the variable display;
A suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (summation holding storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
Action effects that change the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (effects such as stabbing an arrow on a hold display as shown in FIGS. 12C, 12E, and 12G) ) Action effect execution means (such as effect control microcomputer 100),
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high). Set to low slew rate output state),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 12F and 12G). Thus, after the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed, the display mode of the character image can be changed to the second character image 92).

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved about the process before performing an effect production. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(Means 2) A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous for a player,
Specific display means (such as the production control microcomputer 100, the processing of S707 in FIG. 10) capable of displaying a specific display (pending display, active display, etc.) for the variable display;
A suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (summation holding storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
Action effects that change the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (effects such as stabbing an arrow on a hold display as shown in FIGS. 12C, 12E, and 12G) ) Action effect execution means (such as effect control microcomputer 100),
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, flexible cable, wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). ) Is set to normal slew rate output status)
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 12F and 12G). Thus, after the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed, the display mode of the character image can be changed to the second character image 92).

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved about the process before performing an effect production. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(Means 3) A gaming machine of means 1 or means 2,
In the period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed, change effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (the effect control microcomputer 100, FIG. 16). If the change effect restriction flag is set in S502, the following processing is not performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the suggestion image.

(Means 4) A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
A first pattern in which the suggestion image is displayed in the first mode and then the action effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C), the first character image 91 is displayed, and then an arrow is displayed on hold. First pattern to stab, etc.)
A second pattern in which the suggestion image is displayed in the second mode and then the action effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E), the second character image 92 is displayed, and then the arrow is suspended. Second pattern to stab)
After the suggestion image is displayed in the first mode, the first pattern is displayed as shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g). After displaying 91, the third character image 92 is changed to a second character image 92 and then a third pattern in which an arrow is put on the hold display is provided.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of patterns can be executed, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

(Means 5) A gaming machine of means 4,
The second pattern is more likely to change the specific display than the first pattern, and the third pattern is more likely to change the specific display than the first pattern (FIG. 14). As shown in (B) and (C), the second pattern is easier to execute the change effect than the first pattern (it is more difficult to select the gaze effect), and the third pattern is changed than the first pattern. Production is easy to be executed (Gase production is difficult to select)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which pattern is executed.

(Means 6) A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Depending on the period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific display changes is different (as shown in the modification, the action effect is displayed after the character image is displayed). The expectation that the hold display changes depending on the period until execution, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to a period from when the suggestion image is displayed until when the effect is performed.

(Means 7) A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The period from when the suggestion image is displayed until the action effect is executed is a period spanning a plurality of variable displays (as shown in S510 and S512 in FIG. 16, after the character image is displayed, For example, a period spanning a plurality of variable displays is determined as a period of action effects by the 15 performance execution timing determination table).

  According to such a structure, a player can be made to pay attention during the period over which the variable display is performed a plurality of times.

(Means 8) A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
On-hold storage means (such as the RAM 55) for storing the variable display that has not yet been started as on-hold storage;
Hold display means (effect display device 9, total hold storage display unit 18c, etc.) capable of displaying the hold memory stored in the hold storage means as a hold display (hold display, etc.);
Fluctuation corresponding display means (effect display device 9, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of performing fluctuation corresponding display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the fluctuation display during execution of the fluctuation display;
A hold display mode change (such as a change during hold display in FIG. 18) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and a mode of the change correspondence display during the execution of the change display. A plurality of timings during the period of the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage, at least one of the display form changes to be changed (change during active display in FIG. 18, etc.). Display mode changing means (such as a display mode change timing determination function of the production control microcomputer 100) that can be executed at any of the timings (second embodiment, etc.)
The display mode changing means is configured to display a first specific display (FIG. 17A) in which the type of display of the change target (display at the time of holding appearance, etc.) is different from the normal display (such as the circular display mode shown in FIG. 12). The display mode change (FIG. 17A) depends on whether it is the character icon shape display mode at the time or the second specific display (character icon shape display mode at the time of appearance of FIG. 17B). ), (B) display timing change from the appearance change display to the first change display or the second change display, etc.) is changed (in the second embodiment, in FIGS. 18A and 18B). As in B), the character icon shape display mode has a high change effect execution rate during the hold display, and the rate at which the display mode actually changes when the change effect is executed as shown in FIGS. On hold display and active display Therefore, depending on whether the character icon shape display mode or the character icon shape display mode is selected, the frequency of the icon display mode changes depending on whether the display is on hold or active, and the display is on hold. And the ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode between active display and active display).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change for the hold display mode change and the change display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means 9-16. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is awarded to the player. There is something configured to give to. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as “round”.

  Some such gaming machines are configured such that the signal waveform rises gently in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate. For example, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117505 (particularly, paragraphs 0071 and 0096, FIG. 6), a signal processing unit (output unit) has a waveform in which a signal rises more slowly than a rectangular waveform. A gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference by deforming and outputting a rectangular wave is known.

  According to such a gaming machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by causing the waveform of the signal output from the output means to rise gently. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board where the output means is provided is insufficient, and the control signal has sufficient noise resistance to prevent malfunction. There is a possibility that it cannot be increased. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high). The output state is set to a low slew rate).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(Means 10) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is provided:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, flexible cable, wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). ) And is set to a normal slew rate output state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(Means 11) In the gaming machine of means 9 or means 10,
The output means outputs a specific signal (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23) from a specific signal output unit (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by a parallel communication method. , Output signals from Q0 to Q11) (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 34, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels).
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, as shown in FIG. 34, the output timings of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 are dispersed for each group. May be configured).

  According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(Means 12) In the gaming machine of means 11,
A movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs an operation;
Driving means for operating the movable member (for example, operation motors 9060A to 9060C) are driven based on a specific signal output from a specific signal output unit of the same group of output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36). In addition, signals input to the same operation motor may be connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(Means 13) In any of the gaming machines of means 9 to 12,
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the control signal was input (for example, the T terminal is set to H (high) By setting, the timeout function is set to an effective state (see FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

(Means 14) In the gaming machine of means 13,
Control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeats at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the production control process (see step S9065)). By outputting the control signal, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, or the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The control may be performed such that the drive control is continuously executed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

(Means 15) In the gaming machine of means 13 or means 14,
The output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to an invalid state, and the T terminal is set to H (high)). Thus, the timeout function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce costs by sharing parts.

(Means 16) In any one of the gaming machines from means 9 to 15,
The control means includes a movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012) and performs an operation,
When the first substrate and a second substrate different from the first substrate are connected, the control unit detects from the detection unit (for example, the movable member position sensor 9061) that can detect the state of the movable member. Based on this signal, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed (see, for example, steps S9058 to S9060 of the production control main process), and the first board and the second board (eg, the production control relay board 9016A). , Etc.) may be configured to be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member (see, for example, step S9057 of the effect control main process).

  According to such a configuration, the work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an effect production. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding change aspect determination table. It is a figure which shows a holding | maintenance change production | presentation determination table and a gasse production | presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows an effect execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice processing. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. These are various data tables used when the hold display is determined to be an icon-shaped display mode such as a character icon or character icon. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the case where a several movable member will be in the advance state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a production | presentation movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, and right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for describing each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit illustrated in FIG. 30. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and input / output content. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of memory inspection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of calculation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of audio | voice data, and the operation example which reproduces | regenerates a music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in an upper side mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in a lower side mechanism.

  Hereinafter, an exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine, or a gaming machine capable of playing a game. Any game machine may be used.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 125 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 122 and the like. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 as first display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other, A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area is provided on the display screen for effect display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as “special symbol”, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as “special symbol indicator (variable display unit). ) ".

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b 2 When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is in the first start winning opening 13). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 14 (including winning), the start condition of the change display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed) The display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, rocking, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols are displayed synchronously in the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols are switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach states”) is referred to as “reach effect”.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variation display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called “reach formation symbols” or “reach symbols”.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called “reach production”. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is referred to as “reach effect display”. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called “super reach”.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as “start winning port or start port”.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the combined hold storage display unit, the hold storage number can be specified as the hold storage display by, for example, the number of display of the predetermined image, by displaying the hold storage image (one hold storage image corresponding to each hold storage information, Is specified). In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In each of the first special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of hold memories are “hold display”, or , Called “pending storage display”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured so as to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Further, an accessory 12 is provided above the effect display device 9. The accessory 12 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 9 and can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 12 is usually located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and moves to a position (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 9) that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In this embodiment, the special game state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency that the variable prize ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state or the short time state. There are cases where the control is performed in an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approaching and higher frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Since the electric Chu support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a “high base state”.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the execution frequency of the variation display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency at the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a term indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state, “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs. The normal big hit may be controlled so as to become a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the production control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 provides an effect control command for instructing effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows signals to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. And the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 through the audio output board 70. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 is detected from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter through. Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 as an input to the I / O port unit 105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. The effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory 12 by driving the accessory motor 17 via a motor drive circuit (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the type of random number, the update range, the usage, and the addition condition. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.
(2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination).
(3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination).
(4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination).
(5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol for variable display is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it do. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type having a short variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in a case where the hold number shortening control state is not set. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the non-holding number shortening control state. In the hold number reduction control, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared to the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5B shows a case in which a jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as “first holding memory”) based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13 (change of the first special symbol). It is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the display is performed. FIG. 5 (C) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as “second holding memory”) based on a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 (change of the second special symbol). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when a display is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either “normal jackpot” or “probable variation jackpot”, and is also referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, and is a determination value corresponding to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability variable jackpot” (jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probable variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value having the same random 1 value as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot symbol having the same random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. To do. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the big hit type is selected from a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the ratio of the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C may be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B. . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the time-short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 and each variation pattern for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  Further, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 6 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) for shifting to the probability variation state.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  The column labeled “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type” in the table of FIG. 6 has a function as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 2 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type”. It is a column to show. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values are included in each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  In the table of FIG. 6, “Random 3 range” and “Fluctuation pattern” are described as functions of a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between “Random 3 range” and “Variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All values of random 3 (1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values of 1 to 220. If it matches any numerical value of the determination values assigned to ˜70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time-short state, when the variation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the short-time state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time short state deviation determination table in FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that in the normal state deviation time determination table in FIG. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-short state.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B that are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection type of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D that are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 6D that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is issued at the time of starting winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (for example, when a start opening switch passing process described later is executed). And sent to the production control microcomputer 100. Also, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the time of starting the variable display (for example, when executing the special symbol variable display in-process described later). Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, a combined reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the number of reserved memories after subtraction. In addition, the command which can specify the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the combined reserved memory number, and the production control microcomputer 100 transmits the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. May be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit is won at the start winning, and which judgment value range is the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number. . Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The reserved storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and random number for variation pattern determination (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating a software random number, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, on the basis of winning at the first start winning opening 13, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In some cases, “holding stored” indicates that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance. It may be extracted at the time of the start of symbol variation.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of starting winning and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize slot 14, it is called a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command. A command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start prize designation command, and total pending storage number designation command are received. A storage area for storing data that can identify received commands is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach It is composed of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effects, etc., or various effect operations that are not accompanied by display changes of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a corresponding symbol is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. A first reserved storage buffer to be stored, and a second reserved storage buffer in which reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of the first reserved memory data stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second reserved memory data is counted on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are determined), and the variation time is measured according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a process of performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the production control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S305). When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify a received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol used by the microcomputer 100 for effect control) , SR2 for determining the pending change mode, SR3 for determining the content of the change effect, etc.) is executed to update the count value of the counter (S706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and determined for each. It is used as a random number by being extracted at the same timing.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S707).

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-read effect process (S500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on, any one of S800 to S807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbols, but the control related to the change display of the effect symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of the display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a jackpot, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the jackpot may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for performing processing for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The round process (S805) is a process for performing display control during a round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to post-round processing, and if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

[Pending change effect]
Next, various effects will be described. In this embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold change effect indicating the expected degree of jackpot of the hold display is executed before the change display of the changed hold display is started. In the hold change effect, the hold display that is normally displayed in white changes to one of blue, green, and red. The big hit expectation is higher in the order of white <blue <green <red.

[Type of pending change effect]
The hold change effect includes a normal hold change effect in which the color of the hold display changes when the start winning is generated and the hold display is started or when the hold display is shifted, and an action effect for changing the hold display. A hold change effect by an action effect that changes the hold display after execution is provided.

[Action effect]
In the effect, the suggestion image related to the change in the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a different area from the display area of the hold display. And in an effect production, the display mode of a hold display is changed by making the suggestion image act on a hold display. To act here means to have some influence on the hold display, and a specific example of the effect will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, a predetermined period is provided from when the suggestion image is displayed until the action effect is executed. And the display mode of a suggestion image may change in the period after an suggestion image is displayed until an effect production is performed. In addition, a plurality of types of action effects are provided. In this embodiment, action effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are provided. In addition, the action effect is also provided with a pattern of the effect that does not cause a change in hold.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the effect. FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating a display example of the effect display device 9 at the start of variation. FIGS. 12B, 12 </ b> D, and 12 </ b> F are diagrams illustrating a display example of the effect display device 9 when the suggestion image when the effect effect is executed is displayed. 12C, 12E, and 12G are diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 9 when the effect effects of the first pattern to the third pattern are executed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are variably displayed is indicated by three downward arrows. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the display area of the effect display device 9, below the three downward arrows, the combined hold indicating the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number A storage display portion 18c is formed. Note that the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may be displayed separately.

  In addition, when the variable display is started in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display (the leftmost hold display) displayed from the oldest is deleted. Further, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one to the left. An image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or an active display) showing a variation-corresponding display corresponding to the variation display during execution of the variation display corresponding to the suspended display that has been deleted (moved or shifted) from the total suspension storage display unit 18c. Active display area AHA is displayed in the lower left area of the display area of the effect display device 9. In the active display area AHA, the hold image displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c corresponds to the hold image displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA. Is displayed as the active display AH in such a manner that it can be specified. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  It is assumed that a new start prize is generated from the state of FIG. 12A, and that the start prize is accompanied by a hold change effect (including a gaze effect that does not change hold). Such hold display will be described below as target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the first character image 91 as the suggestion image is displayed. The first character image 91 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with an image indicated by an arrow in the right hand.

  The action effect of the first pattern shown in FIG. 12C is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state of FIG. In the action effect of the first pattern, an effect is performed in which the first character image 91 displayed first throws an arrow image that the first character image 91 has toward the target hold TH. However, as shown in FIG. 12C, the arrow image does not reach the target hold TH and does not act on the target hold TH and stalls on the way. As described above, although the action effect is executed, the action effect of the first pattern of the gusset that does not actually cause a change in hold is shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 12A, as shown in FIG. 12D, when the target hold TH is generated and displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the second character image 92 as the suggestion image is displayed. Is done. The second character image 92 has a humanoid shape and is displayed with an image indicated by an arrow on the right hand, and is different in color from the first character image 91, for example.

  The action effect of the second pattern shown in FIG. 12E is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state shown in FIG. In the action effect of the second pattern, an effect is performed in which the first character image 92 displayed first throws an arrow image that the second character image 92 has toward the target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), the arrow image acts on the hold display by sticking to the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the big hit expectation. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure). By changing the display mode of the target hold TH, it can be expected that the hold display becomes a big hit.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 12A, as shown in FIG. 12F, when the target hold TH occurs and is displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the first character image 91 as the suggestion image is displayed. Is done.

  The action effect of the third pattern shown in FIG. 12G is executed during the execution of the change display just before the start of the change display of the target hold TH from the state of FIG. In the action effect of the third pattern, the character image is changed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 in a predetermined period until the effect that the first character image 91 displayed first throws an arrow image is executed. Change. Specifically, the character image changes from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92 during the execution of the variable display immediately before the variable display of the target hold TH is started. Then, an effect is performed in which the second character image 92 throws the arrow image it has toward the target hold TH. As shown in FIG. 12 (g), the arrow image acts on the hold display by sticking to the target hold TH, and the display mode of the target hold TH changes from normal white (white circle in the figure) to the big hit expectation degree. It changes to a high red color (black circle in the figure).

  An example of setting the effect described above will be described below. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pending change mode determination table. In the hold change mode determination table, it is determined whether or not the hold change is performed and, when the hold change is performed, whether the display mode of the hold display is blue, green, or red. The hold change mode determination table includes the jackpot hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13A and the loss hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 13B. Each of these pending change mode determination tables is stored in the ROM 102.

  The jackpot hold change mode determination table in FIG. 13A is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. 13B is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the variation display result.

  In each of the pending change mode determination tables of FIGS. 13A and 13B, a total of 110 numerical values of the random number SR2 for holding change mode determination (numerical range of 0 to 110) are determined to be unchanged (white). , Blue color decision, green color decision and red color decision. For SR2, for the sake of clarity, the number of allocated random values is shown.

  In the big hit hold change mode determination table of FIG. 13A, data is selected so as to have a selection ratio of “no change (white) <blue <green <red” according to the value of the random number SR2 for hold mode determination. Is set. Further, in the off-hold hold change mode determination table of FIG. 13B, the selection ratio of the magnitude relationship of “no change (white)> blue> green> red” is set according to the value of the random number SR2 for hold mode determination. Data is set in.

  By setting the data as shown in FIG. 13, the data is set so that the ratio of executing the hold change effect is higher at the time of big hit than at the time of loss. Also, when the big hit, it is easy to change the hold so as to have a magnitude relationship of “blue <green <red” compared to the case of the loss. Therefore, when the pending change is executed, the big hit expectation is high in this order.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a hold change effect determination table and a gasse effect determination table. FIGS. 14A and 14B show a hold change effect determination table at the time of big hit and off. FIG. 14C shows a gasse effect determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102.

  The jackpot hold change effect state determination table in FIG. 14A is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the jackpot display result. 14B is used when it is determined that the variation display result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is the variation display result. In addition, the gasse effect determination table of FIG. 14C shows whether or not to execute the gaze effect when it is determined that there is no pending change in FIG. Used when determining content.

  In each hold change effect determination table of FIGS. 14A and 14B, a total of 100 numbers of random numbers SR3 (value range of 0 to 100) for determining the contents of the hold change effect are determined as the normal hold change effect. And the determination of the first pattern action effect, the determination of the second pattern action effect, and the determination of the third pattern action effect. Further, in the gasse effect determination table of FIG. 14C, a total of 100 numerical values of the random number SR3 (value range of 0 to 100) for determining the contents of the gaze effect are determined to determine that there is no gaze effect and the first gasse effect. Allocation is made to the determination of the pattern action effect, the determination of the second pattern action effect of the gasses, and the determination of the third pattern effect effect of the gasses. For SR3, in order to clarify the explanation, the number of allocated random values is shown.

  In the jackpot hold change effect determination table of FIG. 14A, “normal hold change effect <first pattern effect effect <second pattern effect effect <third pattern effect effect” depending on the value of random number SR3 for determining the hold change effect. The data is set so as to have a selection ratio of a magnitude relationship of “”. Further, in the off-hold change effect determination table of FIG. 13B, “normal hold change effect> first pattern effect effect> second pattern effect effect> third pattern depending on the value of the random number SR3 for determining the hold change effect. Data is set so as to be a selection ratio of magnitude relation “action effect”.

  Further, in the gasse effect determination table of FIG. 14C, “no gaze effect <first pattern action effect (gase) <second pattern effect effect (gase) <third” depending on the value of the random number SR3 for determining the gaze effect. Data is set so as to have a selection ratio of a magnitude relationship of “pattern action effect (gase)”.

  By setting the data as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the data is set so that the ratio of execution of the hold change effect with the action effect is higher than that of the normal hold change effect at the time of the big hit. Is set. In addition, the content of the hold change effect is more easily determined so that the magnitude relationship of “normal hold change effect <first pattern effect effect <second pattern effect effect <third pattern effect effect” is greater at the time of the big hit than at the time of loss. . Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation is high in this order.

  Further, by setting data as shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C, the first pattern action effect, the second pattern action effect, and the third pattern action effect at the time of deviation are the first pattern action effect. <Second pattern action effect> Easily executed at a ratio of third pattern action effect. In addition, the second pattern action effect is less likely to be executed than the first pattern action effect. In addition, the third pattern action effect is less likely to be executed than the first pattern action effect. In other words, the hold display is more easily changed when the second pattern action effect is executed than the first pattern action effect, and the hold display is more likely when the third pattern action effect is executed than the first pattern action effect. Easy to change. The change of the hold display has a high rate of changing in the order of the first pattern action effect <the second pattern action effect <the third pattern action effect. More specifically, in the first pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 30 / (30 + 20) = about 60%, and in the second pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 20 / (20 + 10) = about 66%. In the third pattern action effect, the hold display changes at 10 / (10 + 1) = about 90%.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an effect execution timing determination table in a table format. The effect execution timing determination table is a table for determining the execution timing of various effects such as a hold change effect. The various effects include the normal hold change effect, the effect effects of the first to third patterns described in FIG. 16, and the gas effect effect of the first to third patterns. The effect execution timing determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

  The effect timing determination table of FIG. 15 shows execution timings of various effects when the total number of suspensions is 1 to 8. In this embodiment, the variable display is executed in order by digesting in order from the leftmost hold memory among the hold memories (hold information) displayed on the combined hold memory display unit 18c. When the hold display based on the leftmost hold storage is erased, the hold display based on the next fluctuation is displayed on the leftmost side. Thus, the hold display moves (shifts) to the next hold display area at a predetermined timing. And the execution timing of various effects is the timing during the variable display executed after the hold display is shifted. Therefore, the timing at which various effects are executed is determined based on the relationship between the current total number of pending storage and the number of shifts of the pending display. The numbers shown in the table of FIG. 15 indicate the timing at which the various effects are executed as a percentage for the total number of pending storage, and “-” indicates that the various effects are not executed at this timing. ing.

  For example, when the total number of reserved storage is 3, the execution timing of various effects is 30% when the hold display is shifted from 3 to 2, and 70% when the hold display is shifted from 2 to 1. Various productions are performed. When the total number of reserved storage is 2, various effects are executed at an execution rate of 100% when the hold display is shifted from 2 to 1. As shown in FIG. 15, the execution timing of various effects is set such that the execution ratio increases as the timing closer to the start of target variation display. It should be noted that the execution timing of the effect may be different between the normal hold change effect and the effect effect. Moreover, the execution timing of various effects may be varied depending on whether the display result is a jackpot display result or a shift display result.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the prefetch notice process. In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit formed in the RAM 103. The receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize slot 13 or the second start prize slot 14, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a start prize designation command (first or second start prize designation command), and a summation pending Four commands called a memory number designation command are transmitted as one set from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data specifying the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning, from the head in the empty area of the start winning received command buffer. The empty area of the reception command buffer at the time of start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0000 (H)”. At the time of starting winning, command transmission is performed in the order of a symbol specifying command, a variation type command, a starting winning specifying command (first and second), and a combined pending storage number specifying command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. It will be stored in the order of.

  In the pre-reading notice process, the production control CPU 101 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer to confirm whether or not the newly received command is the latest command, and adds the total pending storage number designation command. And a variation type command (a command for designating a variation pattern type at the time of starting winning) is determined (S501). If these commands do not exist in the latest area of the received command buffer at the time of the start winning prize (the area for storing the latest received command (the latest command) among the areas of the received command buffer at the time of the start winning prize), the processing ends. (N in S501). On the other hand, if these commands are received (Y in S501), it is determined whether or not the change effect restriction flag is set (S502). The change effect restriction flag is a flag that is set in the processing of S512 described later, and when an effect related to changing the hold display including the gaze effect is being executed, a new start prize is given thereafter. This is a flag for restricting the execution of the change effect even when the error occurs. If the change effect restriction flag is set, the process ends (Y in S502).

  If the change effect restriction flag is not set (N in S502), it is determined whether or not the current total number of reserved storage is 2 or more (S503). Whether or not the total number of the current pending storage numbers is 2 or more is determined by the value of the total pending storage number designation command. If the total number of the current pending storage numbers is not 2 or more, the process is terminated (N in S503). In this embodiment, since various effects are executed after the start of the next variable display after the currently displayed variable display (at the start time), the total number of reserved storages must be two or more. It is. It should be noted that not only a single variable display period that is executed when the total number of reserved memories is one, but also a variety of effects when the variable time is shortened, such as when the time is controlled in a short time state. Since there is a possibility that sufficient time is not taken, it is possible to secure time for executing various effects when the total number of reserved storage numbers is 2 or more. However, when the fluctuation time is long, various effects may be executed even if the total number of reserved storage numbers is less than two.

  If the total number of the current reserved memory numbers is 2 or more (Y in S503), it is determined whether or not the new reserved memory is the reach variation pattern type (S504). Whether or not the new hold storage is the reach variation pattern type is determined based on the variation type command stored in the start winning reception command buffer. Specifically, for example, if the random number value range shown in FIG. 6B is a variation type command based on a variation pattern type within the range of 180 to 251, it is determined to be reach. If the new reserved storage is not the reach variation pattern type, the process is terminated (N in S504). If the new reserved memory is the reach variation pattern type (Y in S504), it is determined whether or not the new reserved memory is a big hit (S505). Whether or not the new reserved memory is a big hit is determined based on a variation type command or a symbol designating command.

  If it is determined in S505 that the new reserved memory is a big hit (Y in S505), SR2 is extracted, and the pending change mode is determined using the big hit time change mode determination table shown in FIG. S506) and the process proceeds to S507.

  In S507, it is determined whether or not the mode of change in hold determined in S506 changes. If it is determined that no change in hold is made as a mode of change in hold, the process is terminated (N in S507). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change is made (Y in S507), the contents of the hold change effect are determined based on the big hit hold change effect determination table shown in FIG. 14A (S508), and the process proceeds to S509. .

  If it is determined in S505 that the new reserved memory is not a big hit (N in S505), SR2 is extracted, and the hold change mode is determined by the hold change mode determination table at the time of loss shown in FIG. (S514), and the process proceeds to S515.

  In S515, it is determined whether or not the mode of the pending change determined in S514 is changed (S515). When it is determined that the hold change is made as the hold change mode (Y in S515), the contents of the hold change effect are determined by the off-hold hold change effect determination table shown in FIG. 14B (S516), and the process of S509 Migrate to

  In S509, it is determined whether or not the effect determined in S508 or S516 is an action effect (S509). When the action effect is executed (Y in S509), the character image as the suggestion image is displayed (S510). Next, the process proceeds to S511. On the other hand, when the action effect is not executed (N in S509), the normal hold change effect is executed, and the process proceeds to S511 without executing the process in S510. In S511, a change effect restriction flag is set, and the process proceeds to S512. The change effect restriction flag is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit.

  In S512, the execution timing of various effects is determined by the effect execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 15 (S512), and the determined contents are stored in a storage area (effect control buffer setting unit) provided in the RAM 103 (S513). ), The process is terminated.

  In S515, when it is determined that the mode of the pending change determined in S514 is not changed (N in S515), the content of the gaze effect is determined by the gasse effect determination table shown in FIG. 14C. (S517). Next, it is determined whether or not an action effect (gase) is executed (S518). When the action effect (gase) is executed (Y in S518), the process proceeds to S510. On the other hand, if the action effect (gase) is not executed in S518 (N in S518), the process ends.

  When the change effect restriction flag is set in S502 of FIG. 16, control is performed so that the subsequent processing is not executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the character image as the suggestion image.

  Further, as shown in S510 and S512 of FIG. 16, after the character image is displayed, a period spanning a plurality of variable displays is determined as a period of action effect by the effect execution timing determination table of FIG. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention for a period spanning multiple variable displays.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes hold display and active display based on the hold storage information, and during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information. In the case where a change effect such as hold is executed at any one of a plurality of timings (for example, a plurality of timings during hold display and active display), the display type to be changed is the normal display mode. An example in which the selection ratio of the timing for executing the display mode change is different depending on whether the first specific display mode or the second specific display mode is different. Here, the change effect such as the hold is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display. In addition, a change display in which a change effect such as hold is executed may be referred to as a change effect execution change such as hold.

  In the second embodiment, when new on-hold storage information is generated, any one of a predetermined display mode, a first specific display mode, and a second specific display mode is used as the hold display and active display images. The image in the display mode is selected, and the selected image is displayed. For example, a general “circular” shape display mode as a predetermined display mode, an icon shape display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using “character” as a first specific display mode, and a second specific display mode Is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as “character icon”) using a “character” made up of “animal characters”.

  In the second embodiment, when a new on-hold storage information is generated, a normal display mode image, a first specific display mode image, and a first specific display mode image are displayed as a hold display that appears using a predetermined hold display selection table. One of two specific display modes is selected. For example, in the first specific display mode and the second specific display mode, the ratio to be selected when the big hit is set is set higher than when the first specific display mode is lost.

  FIG. 17 shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 17A shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 17B shows a character icon selection table.

  In the second embodiment, the color of the image in the normal display mode can be selected, and the color of the image can be changed by changing effects such as holding. As shown in FIG. 17A, the image of the first specific display mode can select the character type from among a plurality of types of characters, and the character type can be changed by a change effect such as holding. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, the image of the second specific display mode can be selected from among a plurality of types of characters, and the number of characters can be changed by a change effect such as holding. It can change.

  When the first specific display mode is selected as the hold display to appear, as shown in FIG. 17A, after the character icon (small display) showing the characters “small” is displayed on the appearance display The character icon is changed to a character icon (medium display) in which the character “middle” is shown as the first change display, or a character icon (large display) in which the character “large” is shown as the second change display. Is possible. The degree of expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding on-hold storage information becomes the jackpot display result has a relationship of small display <medium display <large display.

  For the second embodiment, a circular hold display and active display as a predetermined display mode, a character icon shape hold display and active display as a first specific display mode, and a character icon shape as a second specific display mode An example of using the hold display and the active display is shown. An example in which the selection ratio of the timing at which the display mode change of the specific display mode is executed differs depending on whether the first specific display mode or the second specific display mode is used.

  In the second embodiment, the character icons used only for the active display are the hold display (circular hold display) in the predetermined display mode, the hold display (character icon hold display) in the first specific display mode, and the second It is good also as what can change from any of the hold display of the specific display mode (the hold display of the character icon shape). In addition, the character icons used only for the active display include a predetermined display mode hold display (circular hold display), a first specific display mode hold display (character icon shape hold display), and a second specific display mode. It is good also as what can change only from any one of the hold displays (the hold display of the character icon shape). In addition, the character icons used only for the active display include a predetermined display mode hold display (circular hold display), a first specific display mode hold display (character icon shape hold display), and a second specific display mode. It is good also as what can change from any two (for example, a 1st specific display, a 2nd specific display aspect) of a hold display (hold display of a character icon shape).

  When the second specific display mode is selected as the hold display to appear, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), a character icon (one animal display) indicating “one” animal character is displayed in the appearance display. After the character icon is displayed, the character icon (2 animals display) showing “2” animal characters as the first change display, or “3 animals” as the second change display, is displayed. It can be changed to a character icon (3 animals displayed). The degree of expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding on-hold storage information becomes the jackpot display result has a relationship of 1 animal display <2 animal display <3 animal display.

  FIG. 18 shows a display mode change effect execution timing selection process, a display mode change effect type selection process, and a change mode selection process when the hold display is determined to be a display mode of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. It is various data tables used for the icon production | presentation setting process which performs.

  FIG. 18A is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. FIG. 18B is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. In FIGS. 18A and 18B, the random value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is assigned to two types of display mode change effect timings during hold display and active display.

  In FIGS. 18A and 18B, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode changes more during the hold display than during the active display compared to when the hold display is the character icon display mode. The rate at which the production is executed is high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio that the display mode change effect is executed in the active display than in the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon Is expensive. Thereby, the player is focused on the display type (for example, the display type of character icon and character icon) to be changed in the display mode change effect and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of holding display and active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  As for the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 18E to 18L to be described later, the ratio of the display mode actually changing after the execution of the display mode changing effect is the hold display. Equal to medium and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display display change effect is higher in the hold display than in the active display, compared to when the character icon display mode, When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display mode change effect is higher in the active display than in the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon Based on whether the hold display is displayed in the character icon display or the character icon display, the frequency of the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display, The ratio for selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the hold display and the active display. Thereby, about the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to changes in the game.

  FIG. 18C is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. As a kind of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, the first change effect in which the blue arrow acts on the hold display or the active display and the second change effect on the hold display or the active display. The change effect is provided so as to be selectable by allocating the random value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

  FIG. 18D is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. As a kind of display mode change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow acts on the hold display or the active display, and a red arrow acts on the hold display or the active display. The fourth change effect is provided so as to be selectable by assigning the random number MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

  FIGS. 18E to 18H show the display mode change effect timing and the display mode change effect selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. It is a change selection table used when selecting and deciding a change mode of icon display for each combination with type.

  When it is determined that the first change effect is executed during the hold display, the table in FIG. 18E is used. When it is determined that the first change effect is executed during active display, the table in FIG. 18F is used. When it is determined that the second change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18G is used. When it is determined that the second change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 18H is used. When it is determined that the third change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18I is used. When it is determined that the third change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 18J is used. When it is determined that the fourth change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 18K is used. When it is determined that the fourth change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 18 (L) is used.

  In the change selection tables of FIGS. 18E to 18H, “no change”, “medium” display, and “large” are divided into a case where the display result of the variable display is a big hit display result and a case of the loss display result. In the display, 100 random number values MR12 (0 to 99) for selecting the change mode are allocated at different selection ratios. Further, in the change selection tables of FIGS. 18I to 18L, “no change” and “two” are displayed separately when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result and the loss display result. In addition, 100 random number values MR12 (0 to 99) for selecting a change mode are allocated at different selection ratios.

  18E to 18H, “no change” indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and “medium” display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon of a character “medium”. The “large” display indicates that the character icon changes to an icon with a character “large”.

  In FIGS. 18E to 18H, the change selection random value MR12 is “no change <medium + large (with change)” when the big hit display result is obtained, and “no change” when the loss display result is obtained. >> Medium + Large (with change) ”. Further, in FIGS. 18E to 18H, the random value MR12 is assigned at a selection ratio of “medium <large” when the big hit display result is obtained and “medium> large” when the loss display result is obtained. ing. Thereby, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon does not change. Also, when the character icon changes to “large”, the degree of expectation that a jackpot display result is higher than when the character icon changes to “medium”.

  As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, when the active icon display has a lower percentage of selection of the character icon display mode than the hold display, the result is a jackpot display result. In addition, the ratio of the display mode change that is “large” display having a higher level of expectation that is a big hit than the “medium” display is higher than that during the active display during the active display. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  FIGS. 18I to 18L show the display mode change effect timing and the display mode selected and determined by the data table of FIGS. 18A and 18B for the display mode change effect of the hold display by the character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and deciding a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a change production type. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result and when the display result is the loss display result, the display is changed into “no change”, “2” display, and “3” display. The random number value MR12 for selection is allocated with different selection ratios.

  18 (I) to (L), “no change” indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and “2” display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to an icon of “2”. The “three” display indicates that the character changes to a “three” icon.

  In FIGS. 18 (I) to (L), the random number MR12 is selected at a selection ratio of “2 animals <3 animals” when the jackpot display result is obtained, and “2 animals> 3 animals” when the display result is lost. Allocated. Thereby, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon does not change. Also, when the character icon changes to “3”, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon changes to “2”.

  As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C, the ratio of the character icon display mode change is lower during active display than during active display, but the result is a jackpot display result. In addition, there is a higher ratio of selecting the display mode change that displays “3 animals” with a higher level of expectation that is a big hit than the “2 animals” display compared to the active display during the hold display. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing for the hold display and the active display.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed, and the character image is displayed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92. The display mode can be changed. If it does in this way, the interest of a game can be improved about the process before performing an effect production.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed, and the character image is displayed from the first character image 91 to the second character image 92. Aspects can be changed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the third pattern for changing the display mode of the character image is more easily selected at the time of big hit than at the time of loss. If it does in this way, the interest of a game can be improved about the process before performing an effect production.

  (3) When the change effect restriction flag is set in S502 of FIG. 16, control is performed so that the subsequent processing is not executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the action effect using the character image as the suggestion image.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, a first pattern in which the first character image 91 is displayed and then an arrow is put on the hold display, and as shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E. In addition, after displaying the second character image 92 and then displaying the second pattern in which the arrow is put on the hold display and the first character image 91 as shown in FIGS. 12 (f) and 12 (g), the second character is displayed. A third pattern in which an arrow is inserted in the hold display after the image 92 is changed is provided. In this way, a plurality of patterns can be executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  (5) As shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C, the second pattern is easier to execute the change effect than the first pattern (it is more difficult to select the gaze effect), and the third pattern than the first pattern. A pattern effect is more likely to be executed (the Gase effect is less likely to be selected). In this way, the player can pay attention to which pattern is executed.

  (6) As shown in S510 and S512 of FIG. 16, after the character image is displayed, a period spanning a plurality of variable displays is determined as a period of action effect by the effect execution timing determination table of FIG. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention for a period spanning multiple variable displays.

  (7) In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the character icon shape display mode has a high change effect execution ratio during the hold display. Then, as shown in FIGS. 18E to 18L, the rate at which the display mode is actually changed at the time of executing the change effect is the same during the hold display and during the active display. Therefore, depending on whether the character icon shape display mode or the animal character icon shape display mode, the frequency of the icon display mode changes between the pending display and the active display, The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode during active display is different. In this way, with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display and the change in the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the change in the display mode. Interest can be improved.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation that the hold display changes may vary depending on the period from when the character image is displayed to when the action effect is executed. Specifically, the hold display may change more easily as the period from when the character image is displayed until the effect is performed is longer. That is, the longer the period until the action effect is executed, the more difficult it is to execute the gasse effect. If it does in this way, it can be made to pay attention also to the period after the character image as a suggestion image is displayed until an effect production is performed. Conversely, the hold display may change more easily as the period from when the character image is displayed until the effect is executed is shorter.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the character image as the suggestion image changes as the third pattern in which the action effect is executed. However, the number of suggested images may be increased instead of changing the suggested images. Specifically, a character image of one person may be displayed first, and the number of character images may be increased by two or three by the time the action effect is executed. Further, the change display expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree of the hold display may be different depending on the timing when the suggestion image increases.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the effect or the like is executed for the hold display has been described. However, the effect or the like may be executed not on hold display but on active display. Further, the effect may be executed in both the hold display and the active display. Further, the suggestion image may be displayed at the stage of the hold display, and the action effect may be executed after the hold display is shifted to the active display.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the normal hold change effect has a lower jackpot expectation than the action effect. However, the normal hold change effect may be set so that the big hit expectation is higher than the action effect. Moreover, although the normal hold change effect has been described as the color of the hold display changing during the shift, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by the character acting on the hold display.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the expectation that the hold display changes is higher in the order of the first pattern action effect <the second pattern action effect <the third pattern action effect. However, the expected change degree of the hold display may be the same for all patterns, and may be set such that the expected change degree is higher when the character image as the suggestion image does not change than when the character image changes.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the action effect may be executed in a period spanning multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-continuous. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Such pseudo-reams generally have a higher jackpot expectation as the number of times of re-variation of the pseudo-reams (the number of times the pseudo-ream symbols are changed again after being stopped) increases. By displaying the suggestion image over a predetermined period during which such pseudo-variation re-variation is executed, the longer the predetermined period, the higher the expected change in the display mode of the active display when the action effect is executed. You may do it. In addition, the suggestion image may be displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect effect may be executed on the hold display instead of the active display displayed when the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the character image as the suggestion image displayed when the action effect is executed changes only in one stage. However, the suggestion image may be changed in two or three stages. Moreover, when changing, it may change two steps at a time, or one step change may be executed twice. In addition, the change expectation may be higher in a change in two or more steps than in a change in one step. In addition, the change expectation may be higher when changing in two steps at a time than when the change in one step is executed twice, or vice versa.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which a display result is always lost when the display mode of the hold display does not change due to the effect. However, even if the effect is executed and the effect that the arrow is not inserted in the hold display is executed, the jackpot display result may be obtained. For example, even if an effect that does not pierce the hold display when the action effect is executed is executed, if a reach is reached after the target hold display changes, the jackpot display The resulting expectation may be increased. Moreover, the big hit expectation degree in this case may be higher than the case where the action effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion image change timings may be provided. Further, the expected change in the hold display may be changed depending on the change timing of the suggestion image. Specifically, the expected change in the hold display may be increased as the period from when the suggestion image is displayed until the suggestion image is changed is longer. In addition, the shorter the period from when the suggestion image is displayed until the suggestion image changes, the higher the expected change in the hold display may be.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the mode of effect may vary depending on the type of suggestion image. For example, when the first character image is displayed as the character image as the suggestion image, the arrow of the first character image is displayed in the form of a thin arrow, and when the second character image is displayed, the second character image is displayed. The arrow of the character image may be displayed in the form of a thicker arrow than the arrow of the first character image.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations of suggestion images and action effects may be provided. Then, the degree of expectation that the hold display or active display changes, and the expectation of jackpot when the change of the hold display or active display succeeds may be varied depending on the combination of the suggestion image and the action effect.

  (12) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiments, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop by the player When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the button, and the combination of the symbols to be stopped is a specific symbol combination, this is applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is also possible. In the slot machine, a bonus such as a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an AT for performing an effect for notifying an internal lottery result, an RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is different from the normal gaming state, The various effects described above may be executed as effects indicating the control to the ART shifted to the AT and the RT. For example, an on-hold display or an active display is displayed at an opportunity won by an AT or the like (including a gasse effect in the case of a loss), and the above-described action effect is executed on the on-hold display or the active display. Also good.

  (13) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. (Sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board. In the case of such a configuration, various determinations performed by the production control microcomputer 100 in the above-described embodiment may be similarly performed by the production control microcomputer 100, or audio output is performed. Control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the board 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the sound / lamp board may be used.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, Although an example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called second if not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode is transmitted before the stop, and the second command is the so-called second stop after reaching the reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect (if the reach is not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the change pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands in this way, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Further, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display.

  (17) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (18) As this embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described, but the game media is enclosed and the game media is You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed has been shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described with a specific value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result when the display of the variable display is determined to be a probabilistic jackpot is derived and displayed, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probable state is unconditionally changed. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Other gaming machines of the present invention are other gaming machines (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be displayed in a variable manner and can be controlled in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. And
Specific display means (such as the production control microcomputer 100, the processing of S707 in FIG. 10) capable of displaying a specific display (pending display, active display, etc.) for the variable display;
A suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (summation holding storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
Action effects that change the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (effects such as stabbing an arrow on a hold display as shown in FIGS. 12C, 12E, and 12G) ) Action effect execution means (such as effect control microcomputer 100),
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high). Set to low slew rate output state),
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 12F and 12G). In this way, a gaming machine is characterized in that the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed and then the character image display mode can be changed to the second character image 92).

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled to be in an advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player, further displaying a variation.
Specific display means (such as the production control microcomputer 100, the processing of S707 in FIG. 10) capable of displaying a specific display (pending display, active display, etc.) for the variable display;
A suggestion image (first character image 91, second character image 92, etc.) related to the change in the display mode of the specific display is different from the display area of the specific display (summation holding storage display unit 18c, etc. in FIG. 12) ( Suggestion image display means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in the lower right area of the effect display device 9 shown in FIG.
Action effects that change the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display (effects such as stabbing an arrow on a hold display as shown in FIGS. 12C, 12E, and 12G) ) Action effect execution means (such as effect control microcomputer 100),
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, flexible cable, wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). ) Is set to normal slew rate output status)
The suggestion image display means can change the display mode of the suggestion image during a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed (shown in FIGS. 12F and 12G). In this way, a gaming machine is characterized in that the first character image 91 is displayed before the action effect is executed and then the character image display mode can be changed to the second character image 92).

  According to these gaming machines, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the process before the action effect is executed. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. In addition, if an unintended performance occurs due to noise during a game, the player may feel discomfort or distrust. Can be suppressed. This leads to the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, with regard to the action effect, it is highly possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended display in such an effect when the player's expectation is drawn or the player's attention is drawn by the change in the display mode. The effect that the interest about can be improved can be acquired more.

Furthermore, the following gaming machines (a) and (b) can be cited as examples of gaming machines that can increase the noise tolerance of control signals for preventing malfunctions.
(A) Electric parts (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. A gaming machine characterized by being set to a slew rate output state).
(B) Electric components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 32 (1)). ))) And a second output state (for example, an output state with a low slew rate (see FIG. 32 (2))) in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state. (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 31). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, flexible cable, wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). And a normal slew rate output state).
Hereinafter, examples of these gaming machines will be described as other examples.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 19 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In FIG. 19, an effect movable mechanism 9050 described later is indicated by a broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 19, the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, a main image display device 905MA is provided. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. Thus, for example, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be individually identified are variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 905MA, the decorative symbols corresponding to each are variably displayed. In this case, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols can be changed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronism with the special game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as “temporary stop display”, and although the display result in the variable display has not been displayed deterministically, the player has confirmed that the variation of the decorative pattern due to scroll display or update display has not progressed. It becomes possible to recognize. The temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, etc., and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed for a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals) Or a combination of English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, numbers, letters or symbols and character images, and character images are, for example, people, animals, other objects, or It may be configured to include a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  Note that the decorative symbols are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and corresponding to the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game, the image display device 905 (main image display device 905MA or a sub image described later). Any effect image can be displayed on the screen of the display device 905 SU or the like. For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, an effect that displays the result of the story corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol may be executed by displaying the effect image having the story. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a battle effect in which a wrestling or soccer game or an enemy ally character fights may be performed. When the variable display result is “losing”, an effect of defeating the game or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display in a specific display region are repeated. And when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state where the predetermined display color (for example, white) is stopped and displayed, or by maintaining the predetermined display color in a non-display state, Derived and displayed decorative symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative design is derived and displayed by maintaining the state where the display is stopped with a display color (for example, red) different from the predetermined display color. In this way, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols may be maintained in a non-display state. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display) as the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined design may be repeated so that other effect images are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect image indicating the predetermined symbol used for variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image indicating a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By displaying, a decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Occurs based on starting prizes by entering. In other words, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B (second start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 19, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure holding memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The installation location of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area, The sub image display device 905SU may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 903, the lower front portion, or the front side.

  Below the main image display device 905MA, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not pass (enter) through the second starting winning port when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. 22, and a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. As a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9028 is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the grand prize winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning prize entrance (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the game balls detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 19, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol holding display 9025C for displaying a general symbol holding memory number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning holes. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  The game board 902 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect by lighting the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment. The effect movable mechanism 9050 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are positioned separately on the upper and lower screens of the main image display device 905MA and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 19 is the one in the retracted state. In this embodiment, the game area of the game board 902 is configured by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate, so that the game ball is generated. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

  FIG. 20 shows a case where a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state located in front of the main image display device 905MA. FIG. 21 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 9051 and 9052 positioned on the upper screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 positioned on the lower screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism having two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or in close proximity to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The movable members 9051 and 9052 are configured such that their left ends are pivotally supported by a decoration member 9057 and are rotatable with respect to the decoration member 9057. The decoration member 9057 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 9051 when the power from the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.

  The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 22 and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B only needs to be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 9052 to be operable. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and are moved up and down by transmitting power from the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. However, it can be rotated around the left end.

  A movable member position sensor 9061 shown in FIG. 22 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, and the like. From the operation states of the corresponding operation motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration member 9057 Any member that can detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be used. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. A position detection signal that can specify the operation positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation about the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, thereby moving the movable member relative to the movable member 9051. A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position 9052 and the like is output. The third position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, so that the movable members 9053 and 9054 can move. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position is output.

  As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. Accordingly, the first to fifth position sensors may detect the operation state of the corresponding movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 and output a position detection signal according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members, respectively.

  In each of the movable members 9051 and 9052, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9051 constitute a light emitter unit 9071 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9052 constitute 90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitting unit 9071 such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color and displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. The display effect by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072 can be executed. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged by the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 included in the movable members 9051 and 9052, partition bodies formed in a lattice shape are provided so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9051 and 9052 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9051 and 9052.

  Like the movable members 9051 and 9052, the movable members 9053 and 9054 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, in each of the movable members 9053 and 9054, a plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9053 constitute a light emitter unit 9073 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9054 constitute a light emitter unit 9074 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color, as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 included in the movable members 9053 and 9054, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9053 and 9054 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9053 and 9054.

  Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction). And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. Don't be. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or difficult to see the movable member 9052. It becomes. In addition, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the movable member 9053. Become. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes visible.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the advanced state where the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. . When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 9052 moves downward from the back side of the movable member 9051 with rotation, and the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with rotation. To do. In addition, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult or impossible to see.

  When the upper and lower mechanisms of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 21A, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054 are the same. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 21B, the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. Match. As described above, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the movable members 9051 are aligned by aligning the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. ˜9054 can give a sense of unity to the display effects. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, by performing an integral display effect with the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, the interest of the effect can be improved. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the production.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are provided at the periphery of the gaming area. Is provided. Each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, a frame member arranged at the peripheral edge of the main image display device 905MA, etc.) A decorative LED may be disposed around the periphery. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. Note that, when an operation by a player is detected, the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B are changed in the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU by the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. Effects such as operation in the movable mechanism 9050, sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and lighting operations (flashing operations) in light emitters such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) It may be used in such as. Instead of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, or in addition to the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, a sensor or the like for detecting the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may have a configuration for directly detecting the player's movement, such as a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, A configuration may be provided that indirectly (remotely) detects the player's operation, such as a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary action may be detected by analyzing a result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In other words, any configuration that can detect the operation of an arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 22 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, a drive control board 9016B and light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting control and light-off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and performs the first special diagram and the second special symbol display. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of a special figure. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory and a solenoid 9028 for a special prize opening door.

  As shown in FIG. 22, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example.

  The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub-side independent of the main board 9011. Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed. Device 905SU, luminous body units 9071 to 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable members 9051 to 9054 and decoration members 9057 connected to operation motors 9060A to 9060C, and other effects Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by various electrical components for rendering such as a device are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, lights on a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, Lighting motors 9060A to 9060C for moving lighting members, movable members 9051 to 9054, and decorative members 9057 that are different from the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the light emitting members constituting the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LEDs. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a driving operation of An effect control microcomputer 90120, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio output board 9013 are transmitted. Wiring etc. are connected. In addition, wiring for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D is also connected via the effect control relay board 9016A. The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. . The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for turning on the light emitters 9071 to 9074.

  The light emitter control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is provided as a left frame LED 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters. The light emitter control board 9016E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the gaming machine frame 903. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. The light emitter control board 9016F is mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903 as a right frame LED 909c. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is only the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. To be transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 via the light emitter control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. The Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is sent from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. To be transmitted.

  Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is provided through the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as an information signal indicating that a player's operation act on the push button 9031B has been detected, a wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012.

  The audio output board 9013 is an audio output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R serving as sound output devices in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed.

  The effect control relay board 9016A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the main image display device 905MA may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 9012 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The drive control board 9016B rotates the movable members 9051 to 9054 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A driver IC for performing control and movement control of the decorative member 9057 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. If the drive control board 9016B includes wiring for transmitting the position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Good. The light emitter control board 9016C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 903 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, etc. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are mounted.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and a sound used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, decorative LED, light emitter control command used to control lighting operations of a plurality of light emitters constituting light emitter units 9071 to 9074, etc. A movable mechanism control command used for controlling the operation of the mechanism 9050 and the like is included.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to that incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 90103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 23 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. On the effect control board 9012, for example, an effect control microcomputer 90120, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and the like are mounted. The ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be partly or entirely built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of the ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be external to the effect control microcomputer 90120. It may be attached. The presentation control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 23 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 90130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, a display output system interface 90142, an audio processing circuit 90143, an audio interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. It has. Note that the VDP 90140 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The VDP 90140, the VRAM 90141, the display output system interface 90142, the audio processing circuit 90143, the audio interface 90144, and the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be partly or wholly built in the production control microcomputer 90120, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 90120.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 90130 to execute control processing. The RAM 90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is provided to execute various processes by the CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140. The ROM 90121 stores various data tables used for controlling the rendering operation, in addition to the rendering control program. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 90122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

  The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing effects. Among the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating display images in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. What is necessary is just to be provided. In the effect data memory 90123C, various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stored in advance, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control content may be provided. Note that the light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

  Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Separately from the image data of the effect image, it is stored in advance in one of the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in either of these. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 may be effect data memories 90123A to 90123A as image data or light emission data separate from the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. When the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the drawing process, display data that is stored in advance in any of the 90123C displays the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. It may be added to the data.

  FIG. 24 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 24A shows an example of setting the storage contents in the ROM 90121. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00 as the leading address to the address MA10 as the final address. FIG. 24 (B1) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123A. In the effect data memory 90123A, an address MA10 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the ROM 90121 is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA20 that is the final address is given. FIG. 24 (B2) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. In the effect data memory 90123B, an address MA20 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123A is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA30 that is the final address is given. FIG. 24 (B3) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123C. In the effect data memory 90123C, an address MA30 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123B is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA40 that is the final address is given. In this way, consecutive addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A.

  In ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 90121 as management data. That's fine. The ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memories 90123A and 90123B store image data used for controlling the display of effect images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and further, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame. Image data used for lighting control of a light emitter such as the LED 909c and a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

  The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Accordingly, the ROM 90121 provides a first area for storing audio data as first control data used for audio control for outputting audio from at least the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A second area is provided for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in the.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 90121 is allocated from the address MA02 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 24 (B1), a storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 90123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 which is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A. As described above, the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

  The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the amount of control information to be stored in the ROM 90121 or the like for controlling the effects by various effect devices increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. There is a case. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced by providing a storage area for data used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 90123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. Thus, the audio data can be read out appropriately.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 23 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts in accordance with the effect control program read from the ROM 90121. At this time, the CPU 90130 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, the CPU 90130 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and temporarily stores them. The CPU 90130 reads out various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and the CPU 90130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 through the host interface 90132 or the like. Receiving operation for accepting input, the CPU 90130 uses the host interface 90132 and other various circuits for effect control micro Such transmission operation to the outside of the computer 90 120 outputs various signals is also performed. In addition, the CPU 90130 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the data memory interface 90134, and read stored data.

  The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed rendering function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example. The image processor executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the CPU 90130. The VDP 90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and read image data.

  The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, or a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, and a CG buffer, for example. Good. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 90140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to Display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 90140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons, for example. The VRAM 90141 stores, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. A virtual display area to be stored may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read out by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. You may output from the system | strain interface 90142 to the main image display apparatus 905MA side.

  An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

  By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned in the second drawing display period, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer may be allocated to each storage area to which an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 accesses system registers and attribute registers built in the VDP 90140. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the CPU 90130 indirectly controls the display operations in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU.

  The process data indicates the setting contents that the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 performs on the system register and attribute register of the VDP 90140 every time V blank occurs. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

  The display output system interface 90142 outputs a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the main image display device 905MA. To output various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The display output system interface 90142 displays a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) as a sub-image display. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU by outputting it to the device 905SU.

  The audio processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The audio processing circuit 90143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the host interface 90132, or effects data memories 90123A to 90123A through the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the data memory interface 90134. The voice data can be read out by accessing 90123C. Note that the audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of audio data. The audio processing circuit 90143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The audio signal (sound effect signal) generated by the audio processing circuit 90143 is output toward the audio output board 9013 via the audio interface 90144.

  The general-purpose output controller 90145 has various effects such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and light emitter units 9071 to 9074 and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. It is a control circuit for performing operation control in the apparatus. The general-purpose output controller 90145 can read motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134. The general-purpose output controller 90145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, motor data or light emission read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 90145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C or the display data supplied from the VDP 90140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

  FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. A light emitter control board 9016C illustrated in FIG. 25 includes a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, a serial output circuit 90153, and a light emitter driver 90154.

  The buffer memory 90151 temporarily stores data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 reads the data stored in the buffer memory 90151 and executes predetermined conversion processing, thereby generating lighting data constituting the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region where a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

  FIG. 26 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 9051 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. The region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged on the movable member 9051 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 26A and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. Divided. Similarly to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are set so as to divide the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. As a result, the entirety of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Note that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

  Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, depending on the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like, the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 cannot be accommodated in the square light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where light emitters less than the body block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the light emitter driving unit 90154 by a serial signal method. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 90153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. The serial output circuit 90153 is connected to serial signal wirings corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21, and outputs a control signal including lighting control information to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal wirings of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

  FIG. 27 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 27, two light emitter blocks among the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are connected to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

  The light emitter driver 90154 shown in FIG. 25 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in the regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers has a strobe side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Accordingly, the driver IC is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. As shown in FIG. 25, in the light emitter control board 9016C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C. By doing so, it is configured so as to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 28, as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11, a strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, a digit upper side light emitter driver 90411DU, and a digit lower side light emitter driver 90411DD. Is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 27 includes the strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, the digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 90153. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

  Different address information is assigned to each of the light emitter driver 90411S, the light emitter driver 90411DU, and the light emitter driver 90411DD. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 is output. Transmit the lighting control information.

  The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC and a serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

  The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. When the light emitter block B11 is configured with only one half block, the light emitter driver 90411S on the strobe side and the light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper digit side are provided, but the light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower digit side is not provided. What is necessary is just composition. Thus, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

  Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 90411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for gradation control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

  Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals output within a certain period ( What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled for lighting is connected in the serial signal system. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in an array emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). As described above, by configuring the dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 90154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

  FIG. 29A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 29A, a motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. The motor drive driver 90412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the operation motors 9060A, 9060B, and 9060C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 29 (2) shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 29 (2), a light emitter driver 90413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016D. The luminous body driver 90413b receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the light emitter driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), a light emitter driver 90413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016E. In the illuminant driver 90413a, a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A and further passes through the light emitter control board 9016D in a serial signal format. Entered. The light emitter driver 90413a performs lighting control of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), a light emitter driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016F. A control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is sent to the light emitter driver 90413c via the effect control relay board 9016A, and further via the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E. Are input in a serial signal format. The light emitter driver 90413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (2), in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are respectively sent to different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. By being sequentially transmitted between the mounted light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are respectively transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the LEDs provided in the gaming machine frame 903 are comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as top frame LEDs 909a above the frame 903, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as left frame LEDs 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as right frame LEDs 909 c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903.

  Further, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411S, 90411DU, and 90411DD shown in FIG. 28) for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the motor drive driver 90412, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuits. (Integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  Note that serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals are different. In the example shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the light emitter driver 90411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel converter circuit, and the motor driver 909042 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel converter circuit. The

  As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives the clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is output to the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E, and the clock signal and data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 90413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E is input via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control board 9016D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. The CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 90413a. The clock signal and the data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 90413c.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit) for inputting a decode address, and the terminals AD0 to AD4 are connected to each other. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 32 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  Generally, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set it to the low slew rate output shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure tolerance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are larger, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control microcomputer 90120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When there is a large transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of a common format shown in FIG. 33 (1) and a basic format shown in FIG. 33 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 30 and 31), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 33 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 33 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, if the operation motor is driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like need not be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed. It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described with reference to FIG. 33, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, the common data shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 33 (2) is different in that the basic format is short because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 33 (3) is different in that it is shorter because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, a 6 MHz clock signal is output from the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 34, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  34, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 34 is used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor driver 909042, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c will be described. 35 to 37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 35 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. FIG. 36 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. FIG. 37 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

  First, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 35 is an example, and since the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, a different decode address is set for each light emitter driver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, all the light emitter drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the illuminant drivers is performed on the same illuminant control board 9016C (transmission across the board is not performed), it is not necessary to worry about the resistance to noise. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. In the example shown in FIG. 35, for convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, it is used for RGB. You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 36 is an example, and other values may be set as the decode address.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 9060A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  Conversely, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 described in FIG. 35, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame LED 909c of FIG. In the case of connecting to the light source, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, it does not cause much trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 37 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different light emitter control boards 9016D. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on ˜9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is great. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 37, a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 37, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a plurality of light emitters, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, which constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in effect control process processing (see step S9065) described later. A control signal for controlling lighting of the right frame LED 909c is output, or a control signal for controlling driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is output. However, since the timeout function is set to an effective state. When the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, the later-described production control process (see step S9065). Accordingly, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continued. It is controlled to be executed.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, the light emitter driver every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals 90413a to 90413c is automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stopped. In spite of the control, it is possible to prevent the operation motors 9060A to 9060C from being stopped due to a signal loss or malfunction, and the operation motors 9060A to 9060C being seized. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the timeout function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Unlike the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c. Therefore, the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is set to an invalid state. Also good.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A), When the production control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. Drive current values of all outputs of .about.Q23, Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided like the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable member) In accordance with a control signal for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 9051 to 9054 (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120), and a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means, Output means (in this example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, a specific signal (in this example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electrical component, Luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 25, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. And control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37, S is used in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically connected to H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards In this example, a substrate (in this example, the light emitter control substrates 9016C to 9016F) that performs only one of the transmissions of the control signal according to the normal slew rate output state is provided. It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output from one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 38, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, and one of the branched branches The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413e on the same light emitter control board 9016G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 90413e and 90413f even on the same light emitter control board 9016G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 38, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. A signal (in this example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). Then, the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 34, the output timing of the output signal from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, As shown in FIG. 36, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high), see FIG. 31). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S9065)). In the above, by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c The lighting control is continuously executed or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 31). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  Next, control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When this game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The start condition is met. Thereafter, the first start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

  When the game ball launched toward the game area passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Is done. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the second start condition is satisfied based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit game state. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. When the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, based on the fact that the normal symbol variable display result by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure", the opening control or expansion opening where the movable wing piece of the electric tulip is in the tilting position is performed. Control is performed, and closing control and normal opening control for returning to the vertical position when a predetermined time elapses are performed. When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the expanded and opened state as the first variable state by the opening control and the expanding and opening control, the game ball can easily pass or can pass through the second start winning opening. The normal figure starting condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal chart start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display 9020 uses a normal symbol display 9020 based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. The figure game is started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is set to “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, “left”, “middle”, “right” arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are also referred to as “left symbol”, “middle symbol”, and “right symbol”, respectively.

  In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As a special symbol variable display result, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “big hit” (specific display result), and when a predetermined lose symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “Lose” (non-specific display result). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, when the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the winning combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous for the player. Then, in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. The round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball switch 9023 detects the winning ball, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of gaming balls are paid out as the winning ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls very easily, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a probable state based on the fact that the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, and the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit probability) is higher than the normal state. Control may take place. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes a short time state, and the short time control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per normal figure”. By changing the length of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous manner by controlling the length of the ball to be longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as “high opening control” (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the “special game state” (“advantage game” which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is reduced. Also referred to as “state”). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state in which they match the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to fluctuation, enlargement / reduction, or deformation, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern, etc., and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (a big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In the reach production, it is only necessary to include a normal reach production and a super reach reach production with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a big hit combination, it is “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect of liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. In addition, on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example, an effect using a character image, or an effect of displaying a notification image based on the determination result of the big hit determination and the variation pattern is executed. The Various effects executed during variable display in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed are also referred to as “variable display effects”. As an example of effects during variable display, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state will reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, the possibility that a super reach reach effect will be executed, variable display A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a “hit”.

  The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice effect patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach-miss combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived).

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. For example, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probable change state. Control, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), can be executed in a short time state The upper limit number of variable display becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”). Such part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  For example, a NAND-ROM is used as part or all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. The stored contents may be rewritable. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. Memory redundancy information may be stored in such a redundant area of the memory. The history information may be information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information may include at least one of model identification information such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 in which a memory has been used and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each amusement store where the memory has been used. By storing history information in the redundant area of the memory in this way, there is no need to attach a barcode for recycling management outside the memory, and it is accurately recycled based on the history information stored in the memory. Management can be performed. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

  Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area that stores correspondence information indicating a correspondence relation between a defective area in the data area and an alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information is built in the memory, and the memory control unit is an arrangement that indicates a storage position of history information in the redundant area. Information may be stored. As described above, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area is stored, and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information is stored, thereby reading data from the alternative area. Similarly to the above, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, game control process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  In the game control process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B and setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED), variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. In the game control process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 first determines whether or not a start win has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the input state (on or off) of a start winning signal that is a detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9022B is checked. What is necessary is just to determine with winning.

  If a start winning is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes), a winning random number is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, a random number circuit 90104 built in (or externally attached to) the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer In a computer 90100, a random number configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102, etc., is updated at least in part by a game random number (random value for determining a variable display result, game state determination A part or all of the numerical data indicating the random number and the random number for determining the variation pattern) is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in a hold random number storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, for example.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S <b> 9013, setting for transmitting a start winning designation command for notifying the occurrence of a start winning to the effect control board 9012 may be performed. If no start prize has been generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), after executing the process of step S9013, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, a process corresponding to the determination value is selected from a plurality of processes previously described in the game control computer program and executed.

  For example, when the value of the game process flag is “0”, it is determined whether or not variable symbol display (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the variable display game is “0” by checking the storage content of the hold random number storage unit. At this time, if the number of hold is other than “0”, the variable display is started because the start of the variable display has been satisfied and the variable display has not been started yet. Determine that it is possible. On the other hand, when the hold number is “0”, it is determined that variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process is terminated.

  When variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101; Yes), a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result is determined (step S90102). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is referred to as “special figure display result”. In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number for determining the variable display result, random number for determining the game state, fluctuation, etc.) stored in the head (storage area with the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit Read random number for pattern determination). The game random number read from the holding random value storage unit may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100. Then, using a random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probable variation state, the variable display result determination table is set so that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state. It is sufficient that the determination value is set.

  When the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state is further changed using the random number value for determining the gaming state and the gaming state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special gaming state. Corresponding to these determination results, a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

  Following the processing in step S90102, an internal flag and the like are set (step S90103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined as “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. set. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probability variation state, a probability variation confirmation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set to an on state, for example. In addition, it may be stored in such a way that it can be specified that the state is likely to change. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “1” (step S90104), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “1”, a variation pattern or the like is determined (step S90111). FIG. 40 shows a setting example of a variation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern indicates that the required time (variable display time) from the start of variable display to the display of a fixed symbol that is a variable display result can be specified and the outline of the production mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is “non-reach” and “reach”. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the above, and corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. For the variation pattern, a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance for each variation time (variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure game or the decorative design. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine the variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols.

  In the processing of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined rate using the variation pattern determination random value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, the variable display result may become “big hit” corresponding to each fluctuation pattern by changing the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not the variable display result is decided as “big hit” (Big hit reliability) can be varied.

  In the process of step S90111, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”. . Alternatively, prior to determining the variation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by using the reach determination random number value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S90111, it is only necessary to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of reach.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9011, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112, as a variable display start command for designating the start of variable display, a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result, variable display such as decorative pattern variable display time and reach effect type, etc. A setting for transmitting a variation pattern designation command for notifying a variation pattern indicating a mode may be performed. Further, in response to the decrease in the hold count due to the start of variable display, a setting for transmitting a hold count notification command for notifying the hold count after the decrease may be performed.

  The variable display time is set in response to the change pattern being determined by the process of step S90112. Moreover, the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol by either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B may be performed. As an example, variable display of symbols may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device using the special symbol on which special symbol display device is to be executed is a special symbol game based on whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second starting winning port It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special game is played by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “2” (step S90113), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “2”, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). If the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90121; No), the special symbol variable display control is performed (step S90122), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable symbol special display is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the fixed symbol is performed (step S90123).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124, a variable display end command for instructing the end (stop) of variable display, or a big hit start specifying command (fanfare command for specifying the start of a big hit gaming state when the variable display result is “big hit”. ) And the like may be set for transmission.

  After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125). If the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to “3” (step S90126), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing” instead of “big hit” (step S90125; No), the game process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” (step S90125). S90127), the game control process is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time saving state is to be ended. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state is ended. Settings for controlling to a normal state may be performed.

  When the value of the game process flag is “3”, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit gaming state according to whether or not a predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131). The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state have ended. When the big hit game state is not ended (step S90131; No), the game operation control at the time of the big hit is performed (step 132), and the game control process is ended. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90131; Yes), the setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is performed (step S90133).

  As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation flag is on. Set to. Thus, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, and it is decided that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probable change state, a game corresponding to this decision result is made. It is possible to control the state to a certain change state. Even in the case of controlling to the short time state, a setting corresponding to this may be performed. Then, after clearing the game process flag and initializing its value to “0” (step S90134), the game control process process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives supply of power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes effect control main processing.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory test process may be executed when a predetermined memory test condition is satisfied. The memory inspection process is a determination process for determining whether the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, a checksum process is executed as a determination process, whereby the storage contents of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are inspected, and the checksum that is the inspection result can be displayed. The effect control main process includes a process for controlling effects by various effect devices, such as an effect control process executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

  In the production control main process, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed when a predetermined origin confirmation condition is satisfied. The origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are positions corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 21A, for example, and each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is disposed above the main image display device 905MA. Each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 may be determined in advance as a position where the movable members 9053 and 9054 are disposed below the main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, an initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and control for setting each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 to the origin position is performed. At this time, based on the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like by the movable member position sensor 9061, it is confirmed whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position. And when it cannot be made to stop at an origin position, abnormality notification is performed noting that origin abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 90130 first checks the connection state of the board (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether an initialization command or a power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time measurement by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing without receiving an initialization command or a power supply restoration command, it is only necessary to determine that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

  42A and 42B show configuration examples for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 42A, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are physically connected to the effect control board 9012 by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. In addition, a connector (socket) CN1 for electrical connection is provided. As shown in FIG. 42 (B), by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1 into the effect control relay board 9016A, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A Is provided with a connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two. The harness HN1 only needs to be configured by binding a number of wiring cables. The connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have corresponding numbers (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TN01) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11. Any relationship that is physically and electrically connected is acceptable.

  FIG. 42 (C) shows a setting example of input / output contents corresponding to the terminals TM01 to TM24 provided in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. Terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (AC24V is rectified and smoothed), VDL (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). In addition, terminals TM01 to TM24 are terminals TM03 and TM04 that supply data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on the drive control board 9016B and the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, and various data by a serial signal system. Terminals TM05 to TM08 for transmitting and receiving are included. Furthermore, a signal SM1 used for confirming connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input to the terminal TM22 among the terminals TM01 to TM24. As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the voltage of VCL output from the terminals TM20 and TM21 of the connector CN01 is the terminal of the connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A via the harness HN1. It is supplied to TN20 and TN21. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the board of the effect control relay board 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, a voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the connector CN11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. The On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

  In step S9051 shown in FIG. 41, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. If the signal SM1 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to no voltage supply, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 serving as the connection check terminal.

  Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A (step S9052). In step S9052, when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A, whereas the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 corresponds to no voltage supply. What is necessary is just to determine that there is no connection with the production control relay board 9016A in the low voltage state. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay unconnected flag is set to an on state (step S9053). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the OFF state by not performing the process of step S9053.

  Subsequently, based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011 (step S9054). In step S9054, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011 when an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. What is necessary is just to determine with no connection with the main board | substrate 9011, when predetermined time passes, without receiving. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the presence or absence of a connection according to the presence or absence of command reception, but is based on the voltage at a predetermined terminal serving as a connection confirmation terminal in the same manner as the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A. It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No), the memory inspection process (step S9055) is executed, and then the loop process is executed to stand by.

  In this embodiment, when power supply is started in a state in which a harness that binds cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started in a state where the harness is connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied, and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. In this manner, the memory inspection condition is established by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 with the cable (harness) serving as the command line attached between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 being removed. You may do it.

  Note that the memory inspection condition is not limited to the condition that is established when the power is turned on with the command line disconnected, and is established, for example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power in a state where the openable / closable gaming machine frame 903 is opened. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting a predetermined arbitrary state.

  In the memory inspection process in step S9055, a checksum calculation using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is performed, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is temporarily turned off, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. The control can be performed. Alternatively, a cable (harness) as a command line may be connected and a reset switch may be pressed so that the production control can be performed without turning on the power again. Alternatively, after the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off, the power can be turned on in a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect can be controlled. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect can be controlled.

  If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes), an initial setting process (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting processing in step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and a CTC (counter and timer circuit) register is set that generates a timer interrupt for effect control. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. In the effect data transfer process, predetermined data (a binary code constituting a program module, etc.) among programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used to execute effects by various effect devices. Can be transferred to the RAM 90122, the VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, execution control of initial operations by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed along with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are changed (moved) from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopped in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returned to the retracted state. And so on.

  After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). If the relay unconnected flag is off (step S9057; No), the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in correspondence with the state-controlled relay board 9016A being connected ( Step S9058). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059). If there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. In addition, after notifying of the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

  In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054, detection signals from the movable member position sensor 9061 are acquired as position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 indicates the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 42A, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 may be included in the signal input to the serial reception terminal TM07. The CPU 90130 confirms the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, and based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054, whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 includes, for example, image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, or the top What can be executed by turning on a notification lamp provided separately from the frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, a notification operation using other effect devices, or a combination of some or all of them If it is. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on whether or not the origin is abnormal. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be realized by controlling an arbitrary output.

  If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 and the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected. The effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this case, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is not input to the terminal TM07 of the connector CN01. For this reason, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed, it is determined that the origin is abnormal, and an abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for example, for the purpose of checking the operation of the production control microcomputer 90120, the power supply may be turned on when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent frequent occurrence of abnormality notification in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, in response to the determination that the relay unconnected flag is turned on in step S9057, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed. Do not execute. Thereby, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. .

  If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or if it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (step S9059; No), the effect control main In the process, an effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed, and numerical data indicating a random number value to be an effect random number is updated by software. The effect random number is counted as various random values used for effect control. It should be noted that the effect random number that is updated by hardware using a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 may not be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the rendering random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random value updated by hardware.

  After performing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), command analysis processing (step S9064), and the effect control process The process (step S9065) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns to step S9061. The command analysis process in step S9064 and the effect control process in step S9065 are included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), the process returns to step S9061 without executing the processes of steps S9063 to S9065.

  FIG. 43 shows an execution example of the abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the execution example shown in FIG. 43, the occurrence of the origin abnormality is notified by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) in the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal? May be displayed. As described above, in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of the game hall can recognize which type of anomaly is out of a plurality of types of anomalies configured using a plurality of movable members, the movable member Anomaly notification may be performed.

  Note that the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to view or cannot be viewed when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. For this reason, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is given by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, there is a possibility that the store clerk or the like of the game hall may be difficult or impossible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or in place of the image display, using a notification unit that is visible regardless of the state of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. May be performed. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, left position, or right position of the gaming machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, or top frame LED 909a or left A plurality of notification light emitting members provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These notification light emitting members may be configured using, for example, LEDs. According to a combination of lighting modes by a plurality of light emitting members for notification, an abnormality notification of a movable member is performed in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can recognize which kind of an anomaly has occurred. It may be. As an example, when the notification unit includes a first notification light-emitting member and a second notification light-emitting member, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member is turned on while the second notification light emitting member is turned on when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. Thus, even if there is a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to recognize depending on the state of the movable member by notifying the abnormality of the movable member by using the notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member, the movable member. It is possible to report in an identifiable manner that an abnormality has occurred and which movable member has an abnormality.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute an interrupt process for receiving a command in addition to a timer interrupt process for effect control, and can receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. As long as it can be acquired from the host interface 90132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process in step S9064, it is determined whether or not an effect control command has been received. If there is a reception, setting or control corresponding to the received command is performed. In the production control process in step S9065, for example, production image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged. Lighting on a plurality of arranged light emitters, lighting on various light emitting members such as top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c and decoration LED different from light emitter units 9071 to 9074, moving movable members 9051 to 9054 With respect to operation control contents using various effect devices such as drive operations of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  FIG. 44A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S9055 of FIG. 41 as the memory inspection process. In the memory inspection process, as a checksum calculation using the storage data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the first checksum calculation using the storage data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the storage data in the ROM 90121 The second checksum calculation using all of the above, the third checksum calculation using the storage data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and all of the storage data in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Of the fourth checksum calculation using, a part or all of the calculations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, an operation using all the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Each calculation result is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

  In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 44A, the CPU 90130 first sets a memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting a checksum calculation start address and a calculation end address by checksum calculation. The table data constituting the memory test setting table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (for example, the first storage area) of the ROM 90121, for example.

  FIG. 44B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 44B, the checksum calculation start address and calculation end address are designated in correspondence with the display counts of “0” to “5”, respectively. The number of display times is the number of times the checksum is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. After “0” is set as the initial value, 1 is added each time the calculation result by the checksum calculation is displayed. You can do it.

  Following the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 44A, the display count is set to “0” (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, it is only necessary to set the display count value to “0” by clearing (initializing) a display count counter prepared in advance. The display number counter may be configured using a built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured using a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the display count is set (step S90203). For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the checksum calculation end address is set to be comparable with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  A checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the stored data at the addresses of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C indicated by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new storage data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the pointer value has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and processing returns to the exclusive OR operation. When the calculation end address is reached, the checksum using the stored data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the contents of the checksum data area. .

  Along with the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205). If the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the display count is performed. The contents are updated and displayed (step S90206). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the execution result of the checksum calculation is controlled so that it can be displayed. On the other hand, if the relay unconnected flag is off (step S90205; No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, control is performed so that the execution result of the checksum calculation is not displayed. In step S90206, the calculation contents are updated and displayed, and the determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal is the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207). If the checksum calculation is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. When the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), the display count is incremented by 1 (step S90208), and then it is determined whether or not the display count has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, “6” as the end determination value in advance, six checksum calculation results can be displayed corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value has been reached, the memory inspection process ends.

  FIG. 45 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, as a checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 44 (B), three types (A) to (C) for the “program ROM” corresponding to the ROM 90121 are shown. Calculation results and the like are displayed, and three types of calculation results (A) to (C) are displayed for the “data ROM” corresponding to the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. In the display example of FIG. 45, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence / absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. 45A corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the display count is “0” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 44B. In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored. (B) of “program ROM” shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA02 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “1” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B). In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the second storage area in which the audio data is stored. (C) of “program ROM” shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all of the data stored in the ROM 90121. 45A corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the display count is “3” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 44B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123A. (B) of “DATA ROM” shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA20 + 1 and the calculation end address MA30 set when the display count is “4” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 44 (B). Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B. (C) of “DATA ROM” shown in FIG. 45 corresponds to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set when the display count is “5” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C.

  The checksum calculation result varies depending on the contents of the stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, when the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are nonvolatile semiconductor memories that can be electrically erased, written, and rewritten, such as an EEPROM or a NAND-ROM, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Different checksum calculation results can be obtained in accordance with the stored program for production control and various data versions. The memory check process as shown in FIG. 44A is executed to display the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, so that the ROM 90121 can be used in the manufacturing and development stages of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control programs and various data versions stored in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be easily confirmed. This facilitates version management of stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and can reliably prevent, for example, inconsistency between the effect control program and the version of audio data, image data, and the like. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the program for effect control and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The version information may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. By displaying the version information along with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the production control program and various data, and whether the stored data is incorrect by reading the checksum corresponding to the version It can be easily confirmed whether or not.

  Note that the storage data used for the checksum calculation, the number of times the checksum is displayed, and the like may be arbitrarily changed according to the setting of the memory inspection for the ROM 90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. Good. As an example, in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 44B, the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” is not executed. By setting, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller checksum. Alternatively, by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the display count “6” or more, the calculation results may be displayed for more checksums.

  The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 44A is executed in step S9055 when it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is on, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the update display in step S90206 is possible, and the determination of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is possible. The result can be displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. Even when the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is off, an update display in step S90206 is performed. I will not. As a result, if only one of the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 is not connected to the production control board 9012, the determination result of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

  Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of or together with the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a and the left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c or top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, lighting of a notification lamp provided separately from right frame LED 909c, notification operation using other stage devices, a combination of some or all of these, etc. The notification which can specify the determination result of the determination process which determines whether the production data memorize | stored in ROM90121 or production data memory 90123A-90123C is normal may be performed. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on the checksum calculation result. Thus, the determination result as to whether or not the production data is normal may be any information that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S9065 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, CPU 90130 may determine that it is the BGM change timing when a predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on an effect control command transmitted from main board 9011 or the like. As an example, the BGM change condition only needs to be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state.

  If it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played back as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, the predetermined area of the ROM 90121 includes data that can specify the start address and the end address in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A for the audio data corresponding to the music reproduced as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The BGM setting table may be stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the gaming state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90152, loop reproduction start control for starting loop reproduction in which the music to be BGM is repeatedly reproduced is performed (step S90153). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the sound processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating a loop reproduction instruction together with the start address and end address of the sound data specified in step S90152. The audio processing circuit 90143 may access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A and read the audio data from the start address and end address sections indicated in the command from the CPU 90130. Then, in accordance with the designation to perform loop playback, the music corresponding to the audio data is sequentially played back from the beginning, and when the end of the music is played back, the playback of the music may be repeated by returning to the beginning.

  With the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probability variation state, the music as the probability variation BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the short-time state, the music as the short-time BGM can be repeatedly reproduced.

  When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), after executing the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, processing according to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 determines the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and performs a process according to the determination value from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program. Select and execute. The processing executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processing of steps S90170 to S90176.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received, and the variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is performed. The process etc. which determine whether to start are included. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the screen of the main image display device 905MA corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols on the above and other various presentation operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result, etc. Yes. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 performs various controls from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to display (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process starts the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command or the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the variable display result corresponds to “lost”. If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Yes. When the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit effect processing, for example, the CPU 90130 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit effect executed in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set contents in the main image display device. Displaying on the screen of 905MA or the sub-image display device 905SU, executing display effects by the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and outputting sound effect signals to the sound output board 9013, the sound and effects from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound output, lighting frame output 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and decoration LED are turned on / off or blinking by output of illumination signals to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and other effect control is executed. And a jackpot game To enable execution of the production in the big hit that corresponds to. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, for example, the CPU 90130 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and an effect image based on the set content Display, output of fruit sounds, turning on / off or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations are performed to enable execution of a jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 90130 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). In step S90401, the CPU 90130 performs final processing based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the CPU 90130 determines different (unmatched) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 is updated by a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 or an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Among the effect random numbers, numerical data indicating random values for determining the left determined symbol is extracted, and by referring to the left determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the “left ”Is determined in the decorative symbol display area 5L. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for presentation, and by referring to a right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, etc. Of these, the right determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed. Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols from the random numbers for rendering, and by referring to the left and right determined symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 and the like, Among them, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the medium fixed symbol among the random numbers for production is extracted, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, among the fixed decorative symbols, etc. The medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the CPU 90130 is the same in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The (coincident) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. CPU90130 extracts the numerical data which shows the random number value for jackpot fixed symbol determination among the random numbers for production. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are aligned and stopped. The decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design. In the jackpot promotion promotion, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable big hit combination) that recalls a big hit but does not recall a promiscuous state is once stopped and displayed in a promising state during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state. This is an effect to notify whether or not.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redrawing effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S90401, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, a notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect or the effect mode when the notice effect is executed may be determined using a notice effect determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121, for example. In the notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number for determining the notice effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the notice effect or the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. . The CPU 90130 may determine the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode by referring to the notice effect determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the notice effect among the random numbers for effect.

  Following the determination of the notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90403). For example, the CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of special figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the determination result of the notice effect produced by the process of step S90402, and sets it as a use pattern.

  After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the main image display device 905MA is performed (step S90405). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140, etc., and provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The variation of the decorative pattern may be started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  Following the process of step S90405, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings for updating the on-hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H are performed (step S90406). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning memory display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S90407), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 48A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 48A, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 9011, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. Data indicating the timing of switching the presentation control may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents such as being executed. Pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121 as management data.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. It is. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Even if display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is designated by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged in a line to constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 Can also be specified. It is not limited to what designates the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by the display control data, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters is controlled using control data different from the display control data. May be specified.

  The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects or the like in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, the audio control data only needs to indicate various settings such as whether or not to perform loop playback in addition to the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. .

  The light emitter control data includes, for example, data indicating lighting operation modes of various light emitting members such as a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED. include. That is, the light emitter control data is data that specifies lighting operations of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes data indicating the operation mode of the movable members 9051 to 9054, such as data indicating the drive mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating and moving the movable members 9051 to 9054, for example. ing. In other words, the movable member control data is data for designating the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation effective period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button, or an instruction operation for the push button 9031B ( Data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting (pressing operation) and data for specifying the control content of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively. include.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, if there is process data that includes all of display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, process data that includes a part of these process data There may be. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

  FIG. 48B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Moreover, you may perform control which performs the display production | presentation by turning on the some light-emitting body arranged in the light-emitting body unit 9071-9074 in the aspect designated with display control data. Furthermore, while performing control to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R in a mode specified by the audio control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in a mode specified by the light emitter control data, Various light emitting members such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are controlled to blink, and the trigger button, operation rod, or push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A is controlled during the operation effective period specified by the operation detection control data. Control to accept the operation and determine the contents of the production. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the CPU 90130 performs the effect devices (main image display device 905MA, sub-image display device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. To 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable members 9051 to 9054, the decorative member 9057, etc. ) Control proceeds. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, light emitter control data # 1 to light emitter control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the content of control of the production operation and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. The VDP 90140 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores them in the work area of the VRAM 90141. The VDP 90140 selects image data corresponding to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU from the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141, and converts the selected image data into pixel data. For example, it is arranged at a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (a position indicated by information indicating a display position in a display area such as the main image display device 905MA). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, display data used to create lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 90143 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 develops the voice data indicated by the command by temporarily storing it in a voice RAM or the like.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 90130 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the presentation control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and variable display is performed when an end code is read from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the updated presentation control process timer value. What is necessary is just to determine with time having passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; No), it is determined whether or not it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452). The super reach production start timing is a timing at which execution of the reach production in the super reach is started. For example, the super reach production start timing may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. If it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452; Yes), BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to OFF according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period in which the BGM is off, the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played back by merely setting the BGM volume to off. Alternatively, during the period when the BGM is off, the reproduction of the music corresponding to the BGM may be paused. After performing the BGM off setting in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. The audio processing circuit 90143 acquires audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production based on the start address and end address of the audio data notified by the instruction from the CPU 90130. Then, while setting the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to ON, the music corresponding to the audio data may be reproduced sequentially from the top.

  If it is not the super reach production start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after performing the music on setting in step S90454, it is determined whether it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455). The super reach production end timing is a timing at which the execution of the reach production in the super reach is completed, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 47, for example. When it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach production is performed (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to OFF in accordance with a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set off and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After performing the music off setting for the super reach production in step S90456, the BGM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to ON according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the BGM volume may be changed and the output may be turned on.

  If it is not the super reach production end timing in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after performing the BGM on setting in step S90457, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Then, after performing other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design (step S90458), the variable display effect processing is ended.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S90459 (step S90459; Yes), for example, a final stop that is a display result in variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 90140. A control for deriving and displaying a symbol (definite decorative symbol) is performed (step S90460). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 49, after setting the music-off setting for the super reach effect in step S90456, the BGM-on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. 46 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is “big hit”, following the music off setting for super reach production, the fanfare production music that notifies that the variable display result is “big hit” is played, Then, in response to the gaming state becoming the big hit gaming state, the music for the big hit directing may be reproduced. Note that the music for the super reach production may be directly played as the music for the big hit production as it is. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, if the BGM on setting is performed corresponding to the execution of the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. Good. Thereby, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is possible to smoothly start the reproduction of the music to be BGM.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control process timer value is determined based on the effect control pattern (for example, the special figure changing effect control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. Using the process data acquired in this way, control for executing the rendering operation by various rendering devices is performed. Also in the big hit effect processing in step S90175 shown in FIG. 46 and the big hit end effect processing in step S90176, the CPU 90130 reads out the effect control pattern from the ROM 90121 and the like, and uses the process data acquired based on the effect control process timer value. What is necessary is just to make it control for performing presentation operation | movement by various production | presentation apparatuses.

  In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and switches the effect control execution data in the process data when time-out occurs. That is, in the process data # 1 to process data #n as shown in FIG. 48A, the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is performed based on the next set display control data. The lighting control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be performed. Also, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, audio output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the audio control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Lighting control of the frame LED 909c and the decoration LED is performed. In process data # 1 to process data #n, drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in process data # 1 to process data #n, the detection control of the instruction operation by the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is performed based on the operation detection control data set next.

  In the effect control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 reads various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B based on a display control command from the CPU 90130, and a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. To place. When the effect image is displayed, the same character image may be repeatedly displayed many times. When the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress the image data after reading it. Therefore, in the stage where the display of the effect image is started, the necessary character image data and the like are arranged in the storage area of the VRAM 90141, compared with reading from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. The time required for drawing can be shortened.

  CPU 90130 sets an attribute in the attribute register of VDP 90140 each time V blank occurs after display of the effect image is started, and then instructs execution of reading of the attribute. In response to this, the VDP 90140 reads the attribute. When this reading is completed, a reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. When the CPU 90130 receives the reading end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. Thus, the VDP 90140 executes a drawing process by writing display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer are assigned to each of a plurality of storage areas to which an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the main frame buffer. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and also stores display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. May be. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the subframe buffer.

  Image data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction), for example. Yes. The VDP 90140 reduces the image data for lighting data creation to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size corresponds to the resolution of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in which a plurality of light emitters are aligned. Thus, the image data for lighting data creation has a resolution higher than that of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as supersampling is performed. As another example, the RGB value corresponding to the upper left dot is obtained and displayed as the display data for each rectangular range of 4 dots × 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data, so that the vertical and horizontal directions are each 1/4. Display data reduced in size may be created. In this way, display data to be converted into lighting data is created using image data having a resolution higher than the display resolution of the plurality of light emitters. Thereby, for example, jaggy generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be enhanced. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be displayed smoothly, and the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. Note that the image size reduction may be performed in the image data transformation process or display data rendering process by the VDP 90140, or may be performed using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit only needs to be able to reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction ratio (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. As described above, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit, or may be realized by executing a predetermined program as software.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used to create lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by being written in the main frame buffer. Further, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU by being written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer. In this way, even for the same image data, it is only necessary to be able to use differently depending on the writing position in the VRAM 90141. Thus, the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stored in the VRAM 90141 is for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU or the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As long as it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting. Accordingly, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B includes at least the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

  For example, the display data stored in the sub-frame buffer is output in 1/60 second (about 16.7 milliseconds) for one frame. As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU can update the display image at a frame period of 1/60 seconds. If the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a period of 1/60 seconds. In the light emitter control board 9016C, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store data for controlling the light emitter at a 1/60 second period in which the VDP 90140 outputs display data for one frame.

  In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than a frame cycle (such as 1/60 second) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter at a period of 1/120 second (about 8.3 milliseconds). As described above, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 A control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 can store the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, the light emitter control data of 80 dots × 80 dots. It only needs to have a storage data capacity. Further, by turning on the light emitters with a relatively short cycle, flicker (flickering) in a display effect executed by a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is suppressed, and display is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. The lighting control of the illuminant is not limited to the one that is performed at a cycle that is 1/2 of the output cycle of the display data. For example, the output cycle of the display data such as a shorter cycle (for example, a cycle of 1/3). What is necessary is just to be performed with an arbitrary cycle shorter than that.

  The serial output circuit 90153 emits the lighting generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 in a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written in the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output a control signal corresponding to the data. In this manner, the light emission control data corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing light emission control data corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output period of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. Generation can be completed.

  Note that the buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for a plurality of frames, such as display data corresponding to image display for two frames. It may be. In this case, a plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area of the buffer memory 90151. Each buffer area only needs to have a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for one frame.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (reading address or the like) of the buffer memory 90151 storing the light emission control data. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address. Based on which data stored in which buffer memory area is read out, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 converts the lighting data of the light emitters included in which light emitter block among the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Specify whether to convert.

  The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any one of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each data range divided into a plurality. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 by referring to an address specification table serving as conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this identification result, address information of the light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block B01 to B42 can be designated. The address specifying table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output the lighting data to the light emitter driving unit 90154.

  In addition, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitters. For example, the gradation data only needs to indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 refers to a lighting data generation table serving as color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. Thus, gradation data indicating the gradation control amount is generated. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

  The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to the number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data that is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 256 stages so that the luminance (gradation) is at any level from “0” to “255”. Thus, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is “256”. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a luminance (gradation) of any one of “0” to “63” for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 64 stages so that the level becomes. Thus, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 indicates the number of gradations of “64” which is smaller than “256”.

  The correspondence relationship between the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter is the light emission corresponding to each emission color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of element characteristics (for example, light emission efficiency) and white balance. As an example, a light-emitting diode serving as a light-emitting element constituting each light-emitting body has nonlinear characteristics in which the amount of current increases rapidly when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if converted to a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a risk that display inconveniences caused by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and blackout may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emitting elements corresponding to the respective light emission colors constituting each of the plurality of light emitters have a light emission amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information for converting to may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  FIG. 50 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is set corresponding to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. Here, for each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data, the luminance (gradation) is any level from “0” to “10”. In this case, the table data may be configured so that the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is at a level of “0”. That is, for each light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitter corresponding to one dot, when the brightness (gradation) indicated in the display data is “10” or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is “0”, a restriction is provided so that the light emitter is not lit.

  On the other hand, the lighting data generation table TC1 has at least one luminance (gradation) of “11” or more for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data. In this case, the table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating RGB values proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is generated. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the display data is “11”, the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is “2”. If the luminance of R (red) or G (green) indicated by the display data is “0” to “3”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “4” is generated. If “7”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “1” is generated, and if “8”-“11”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “2” is generated. Thus, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are turned on. It may also be used for creating lighting data to be controlled. At this time, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the same proportional relationship as when the luminance is greater than the predetermined amount If the lighting data is generated below, the influence of the non-linear characteristic in the light emitting diode becomes significant, and an unnatural display effect may be performed. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited so that the light emitter is not turned on. Thus, the lighting control is made different between the light emitters whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount and the light emitters whose amount is the predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitters. In particular, in this embodiment, a light emitter whose light emission amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is provided with a restriction so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. The lighting control is performed according to the RGB value of the lighting data that is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by varying the lighting control depending on whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, the influence due to the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the display effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the production.

  A plurality of types of lighting data generation tables may be prepared in advance, and any one of the lighting data generation tables may be selected as a usage table based on a predetermined selection setting. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each light emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitter. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB01 is selected according to the color B (blue). On the other hand, in the case of the light emitter blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table according to the emission color G (green). TG02 is selected, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). In the case of the light emitter blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Each lighting data generation table indicates the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicating the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by the VDP 141 by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include table data to be converted into The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. The gradation control amount is determined.

  The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the emission color. Therefore, the display data is converted so that the correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is converted into a gradation control amount depending on the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitter. Setting information for converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  It is only necessary that the display data can be converted into lighting data by using different lighting data generation tables according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block. Each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 emits light at the same gradation according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters depending on the size of the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged and arranged, the front-rear relationship of each light emitter unit, and the like. In some cases, the player may have a different impression. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emission amount can give an impression as uniform as possible corresponding to the same display color. Setting information for conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  Thus, not only the display color levels (RGB values) indicated by the display data, but also the respective light emitters according to the light emission characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitter, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, and the like. Gradation data indicating a gradation control amount corresponding to is generated. Accordingly, even when light emitters including a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors are arranged in a predetermined region of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the color reproducibility is enhanced and the effect of the production is enhanced. To improve.

  Note that not all lighting data is generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be. For example, for each of the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors indicated in the display data, it is determined whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, and any light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount. In such a case, a process of generating lighting data with luminance (gradation) of “0” may be executed so that the light emitter is not turned on.

  As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152, display data for one dot is acquired, and it is determined whether all the RGB values indicated by the display data are “10” or less. . If all the values are “10” or less, the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”. On the other hand, if at least one of the RGB values indicated by the display data is not “10” or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitter block and the light emission color is selected. Subsequently, lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots has been completed. If the generation of lighting data has not yet been completed, display data corresponding to the next one dot is acquired, and the same processing is performed. You only need to repeat it. On the other hand, when the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

  The lighting data generation process is not limited to the generation of lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and the lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, display data that enables gradation control in 256 levels for each display color represents the brightness (gradation) of each display color in 8 bits when binary display is used. On the other hand, in the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits when binary display is used. Therefore, when at least one of the RGB values indicated in the display data is not “10” or less, numerical processing is performed to round down the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the luminance (gradation) of each display color in the display data. By performing the above, lighting data may be generated. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset arithmetic expression. A plurality of types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used for conversion from display data to lighting data are prepared in advance, and the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is selected according to the display color or arrangement (light emitter block, etc.) of the light emitting elements. Display data may be converted into lighting data by selecting and executing the arithmetic processing program.

  The display data is acquired for each dot and is not limited to the setting and generation of lighting data. For example, the setting and generation of lighting data may be performed collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, with respect to one frame of display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, dots having all RGB values of “10” or less are detected, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is detected. Mask data for setting all values to “0” may be prepared in advance.

  In addition, when all the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are “10” or less, the present invention is not limited to the one that sets all the RGB values in the lighting data to “0”. If any of the RGB values indicated by the display data is “10” or less, only the lighting data corresponding to the display color may be set to “0”. As an example, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “100”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) is “8”, and the luminance (gradation) of B (blue) is In the case of “2”, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is “25”, while the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “ The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured to be “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this manner, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitter, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter that causes the light emission amount to be less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color with an RGB value of “10” or less among the display data for one dot, the color of the emission color is set when the RGB value in the lighting data for only that display color is set to “0”. May change. Therefore, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are all “10” or less, it is desirable that the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”.

  Alternatively, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are added and the total value is less than a predetermined value, the RGB values in the lighting data may all be set to “0”. As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data is “30” or less, the lighting data indicates The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured such that the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is all “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this case, even if the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “11”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “0”. If so, the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all “0”. In this way, by limiting the lighting of the light emitters so that the total (total amount) of the light emission amounts of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the display production.

  In addition, according to the RGB value of the display data, the light emission amount is not limited to the one that does not perform the lighting control of the light emitter that is less than the predetermined amount. For example, the influence due to the nonlinear characteristic of the light emitting element is considered. Arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is “0” to “8”, lighting data indicating the luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “9” or The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that lighting data having a luminance (gradation) of “1” if “10” is generated, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs a predetermined calculation. A processing program may be executed. As described above, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited to be performed with a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the display color is greater than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than the predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value in the display data being “10”, and considering the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element, etc. Any value may be set. Depending on the light emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold for determining whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount may be set differently.

  The image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is not limited to that used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared in order to create lighting data. 90123A and 90123B may be stored. In this case, the image data is set in advance so that when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data, the illuminant whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control. You may make it do. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. Also in this case, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without the lighting control.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which address information assigned to the light emitter driver on the digit upper side or the digit lower side is added, and the serial output circuit 90153 supplies the lighting data to the light emitter driving unit 90154. Is output. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for performing dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which address information assigned to the strobe-side light emitter driver is added, and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output to the light emitter drive unit 90154.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter driver 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each light emitter driver receives serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.

  On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data at different timings as serial data SD depending on each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When a control signal is output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of light emitters at the same timing is performed by a large number of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase as a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current is required. On the other hand, by generating a control signal as serial data SD at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, generation of inrush current is suppressed, generation of noise radio waves, and production An increase in cost can be prevented.

  In the luminous body drive unit 90154, each luminous body driver checks whether or not the luminous body driver address indicated by the address information included in the received serial data SD matches the luminous body driver address assigned to itself. To do. At this time, if they match, serial data SD as drive control data and gradation data is taken in and converted into parallel data, and lighting control of the light emitter is performed based on this. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the light emitter driver on the upper side or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data, thereby controlling the gradation of the plurality of light emitters connected to the digit signal line. Thus, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters is performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are aligned. The display effect by the lighting mode of the plurality of arranged light emitters is performed.

  As an example of a specific display effect by the effect moving mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect moving mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is visible. The display effect using the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are positioned above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are positioned below. Thus, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the retracted state where they are not rotating (when stopped), only the light emitters that are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 among the plurality of light emitters. Control the lighting. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. As the display effect by the lighting control of the light emitters, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, or blinking and light emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order, so that the display can be adjusted according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. A display effect or the like may be executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, at least one of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be moved (vibrated, advanced, etc.), or a character or symbol such as “reach” can be displayed using a plurality of light emitters. Good.

  On the other hand, in the advanced state (second state) where the upper mechanism and lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized, it is disposed on the movable members 9051 to 9054. The display effect using all the plurality of light emitters is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA or independently of the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the advanced state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 rotate as the decorative member 9057 moves downward in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, and the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are positioned upward. . When the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating in this way (when operating), the lighting of all the plurality of light emitters is controlled.

  The integrated display effect in the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, the display effect may be executed by turning on all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is visible. Thereby, the effect of the turning operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. In addition, by lighting all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player can visually recognize the light emitters that are not subjected to the lighting control by simple control. Can be suppressed.

  A ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 are provided with a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a program management area R01 serving as a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, and a voice data first storage area serving as a second storage area in which voice data is stored. R11 is provided. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with an audio data second storage area R12 as a storage area for storing audio data and an image data first storage area R21 as a storage area for storing image data. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. Audio data used for controlling audio output by the speakers 908R and 908L is stored in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12. In the first image data storage area R21 and the second image data storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter units 9071- Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters aligned in 9074 may be stored.

  FIG. 51A shows a configuration example of audio data stored in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. . In the example shown in FIG. 51 (A), the start address and the end address in the sound data first storage area R11 and the sound data second storage area R12 in which each sound data is stored correspond to a plurality of music pieces. Is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is used for playing a normal BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, and is stored in a section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. Yes. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is used for reproducing the effect sound at the time of the super reach production in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. . The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

  The audio data corresponding to the music piece B-1 in FIG. 51A is used to reproduce the BGM that is in the probability changing state in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probability changing state, and from the start address MA19 + 1 to the end address MA21. It is stored in the section. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Yes. On the other hand, the end address MA1a of the music B-1 is an address value larger than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. Included. As described above, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 spans both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is memorized. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to play back the short-time BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the short-time state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. . The audio data corresponding to the music piece X is used for reproducing the production sound during the big hit where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the big hit gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. . All of the audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X may be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

  The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 51A includes both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. In addition, it is stored across. Even in this case, the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A where consecutive addresses are given, so the music B-1 is reproduced. Sometimes, as in the case of playing other music, the start address and end address of the audio data are designated, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read out, so that it corresponds to the music B-1. Audio data to be read can be appropriately read.

  51 (B1) to 51 (B4) are timing charts showing an operation example of playing music in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. Among these, FIG. 51 (B1) shows a period of “execution” in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is being executed and “stop” in which it is stopped. FIG. 51 (B2) shows a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. FIG. 51 (B3) shows a music to be reproduced among a plurality of music that can be reproduced using the audio data as shown in FIG. 51 (A). FIG. 51 (B4) shows a storage area from which audio data is read out of the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Show.

  The variable display shown in FIG. 51 (B1) is executed before the timing T01. At this time, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 51 (B2) is a normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in such a normal state, the start address MA02 is set so that the music A-1 as the normal BGM shown in FIG. To the end address MA03, audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is read out. A section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01, the loop playback of the music A-1 to be played back is performed as shown in FIG. 51 (B3), and the audio data first storage area R11 is played as shown in FIG. 51 (B4). Is an area for reading audio data.

  Thereafter, at timing T01, reach production in super reach is started. At this time, when it is determined that it is the super reach production start timing in the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 49, the BGM off setting is performed by the process of step S90453. And the music ON setting for a super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. Thus, in the period when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, from the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 so that the music A-2 for the super reach effect shown in FIG. 51A is reproduced. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is read out. A section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the time when the super reach production start timing is reached at timing T01 until the time when the super reach production end timing is reached at timing T02, as shown in FIG. As shown in 51 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T02, it is determined that it is the super reach production end timing in the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. At this time, the music off setting for the super reach effect is performed by the process of step S90456, and the BGM on setting is performed by the process of step S90457. Thereafter, based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” at timing T03, as shown in FIG. 51 (B2), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be played during the period from timing T02 to timing T03. . Even when the variable display result is “losing”, a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03. Or, in order to clearly notify the variable display result, the reproduction of the music may be paused.

  When the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03, the sound corresponding to the song X from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is reproduced so that the song X for the big hit medium effect shown in FIG. Data is read out. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, from the time when the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03 to the end of the jackpot gaming state at timing T04, the music piece X is to be reproduced as shown in FIG. 51 (B3), and FIG. As shown, the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T04, the big hit gaming state is ended, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probability changing state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 46 that it is the BGM change timing. Then, by the processing in steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is started from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probability changing BGM shown in FIG. Is read out. The section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is played back in a loop in the probability changing state, the audio data read target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, during a period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop playback of the music B-1 to be played is performed as shown in FIG. 51 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and in the period from timing T06 to timing T07, as shown in FIG. 51 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and in the period from timing T07 to timing T08, as shown in FIG. 51 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area. Even during the period after timing T08, the music B-1 as the BGM during the probability variation may be played back in a loop until the probability variation state ends or until the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

  As described above, when the music B-1 that is the BGM being changed in the probability changing state is played back in a loop, the audio data read target area is provided in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The audio data is switched to the second storage area R12. The audio data second storage area R12 in the effect data memory 121 corresponds to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, if the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a of the music B-1 are designated, the CPU 90130 can read the audio data while updating (incrementing) the address as in the case of reproducing other music, and the music B- The audio data corresponding to 1 can be smoothly read out from both the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12, and the music B-1 can be reproduced.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, by performing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process in step S9056, at least a part of the effect data among the effect data used for the execution of effects by various effect devices. However, it may be transferred from the ROM 90121 to the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131, or may be transferred from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C to the VRAM 90141 or the like. In this case, for example, control for transferring the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 or the like may be executed in parallel with this transfer. . As described above, by performing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined production data, the production data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, the first effect data used for the execution of the effect by the display device, such as the main image display device 905MA, for example, the effect by the display device such as the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used for the execution of effects different from. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the initial signal is supplied to the main image display device 905MA or the like using the already transferred first effect data. As a result, the production data is efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

  In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial display of the display device may be started after the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial operation of the movable member is started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, transfer of normal data for operation used for normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then transfer of normal data for display used for normal display of the display device may be started. Thus, for example, the effect data used to execute the effect by the second effect device, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, can be obtained from the effect data used to execute the effect by the first effect device such as the main image display device 905MA. Is also given priority. Thereby, the production data is efficiently transferred, and for example, the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be started within a short time after the power supply is started, thereby suppressing the occurrence of delay.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, in the initial setting process in step S9056, control for executing an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA from the retracted state as the second state that does not overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. You may change to the advance state as a 1st state. Thereby, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or impossible to visually recognize, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed while appropriately performing the initial operation.

  Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the notice effect or the reach effect.

  FIG. 52 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 provided in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decoration member 9057 and can be rotated, and the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 have different rotation ranges. That is, the movable member 9052 can be rotated between a retracted position and an advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. The movable member 9051 has a configuration in which a base body is disposed behind a front surface portion provided with a plurality of light emitters, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the longitudinal direction of the movable member 9051 is positioned on the upper side in a state along the substantially horizontal direction. In the operation pattern T1 shown in FIG. 52B, the movable member 9052 can be rotated without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 52C, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are rotated in an overlapped state with the downward movement of the decoration member 9057 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG. it can. In the operation pattern T3 shown in FIG. 52D, the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060A, and the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060B. Can be rotated with respect to the movable member 9051, and the movable member 9052 can be advanced below the movable member 9051.

  FIG. 53 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the lower mechanism 9050B including the movable members 9053 and 9054 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B. The movable members 9053 and 9054 included in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can move within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. The link mechanism includes, for example, link members 90642a and 90642b and link members 90645a and 90645b shown in FIG. One end of each of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054. Thus, the player can hardly visually recognize the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 53B, the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with a slight rotation by the driving force of the operation motor 9050C. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 53C, the movable member 9054 can be moved upward in accordance with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

  The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. The initial operation for operating the upper mechanism 9050T and the initial operation for operating the lower mechanism 9050B may be set such that the respective initial operations are executed in order and the execution periods do not overlap each other, or at least partially. It may be set such that each initial operation can be executed in parallel by overlapping the execution periods. Even when each initial operation is executed in order, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member. 9057 is operated. In addition, when the initial operations are executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration are used in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns in a period in which the initial operation is executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

  As described above, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 are operated in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. Thereby, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated with a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be appropriately confirmed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As a specific example, in the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 41 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 is not performed. In other words, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In some cases, control is performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. At the same time, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is ON, step S90206. It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents and the like by the update display. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9016A are displayed. When either one of the substrates 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 are not connected, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be displayed. As long as it is configured to be able to be realized.

  Below, the modification regarding abnormality notification of a movable member is demonstrated first. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes of steps S9058 and S9059 are not executed together with the process of step S9060. In the above description, the control is performed so that not only the abnormality notification of the movable member but also the confirmation of the origin position is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the relay unconnected flag is on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining whether or not the origin is abnormal, control may be performed so that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the origin abnormality occurs.

  Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are in the unconnected state, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. Compared to the notification mode of abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected, the notification mode may be difficult to recognize. For example, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the image display size is reduced, the image transparency is increased, and the image display is performed. What is necessary is just to be able to set it as the alerting | reporting aspect which cannot recognize abnormality alerting of a movable member by shortening a period, reducing the frequency | count of displaying an image, or the combination of these part or all. When a notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize an abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of effect devices used for the notification operation may be adopted. As described above, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is determined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is determined, or What is necessary is just to set a limit to the abnormality notification of the movable member according to the connection state by determining the limit of the abnormality notification to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to recognize.

  In the embodiment described above, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process in step S9056 even when the relay unconnected flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay unconnected flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed, while the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. In such a case, it may be controlled not to perform the initial operation of the movable member.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control board 9012 are not directly connected to the effect control board 9012 and the harness HN1 (not via other boards), such as the effect control relay board 9016A. It has been described that the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member in the connected state. On the other hand, for example, a board that is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, is not connected to the effect control board 9012. In such a case, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the above embodiment, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C that provide the driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 that detect the operation state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are all provided. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which provided separately the board | substrate with which operation motor 9060A-9060C is connected, and the board | substrate with which movable member position sensor 9061 is connected. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different control may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 according to the connection state. As an example, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are connected directly or indirectly, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. In addition, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are not connected, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are directly or indirectly connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, it may be controlled so as to notify the abnormality of the movable member while not executing.

  In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of movable members such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, the position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be detected using the movable member position sensor 9061. On the other hand, any state can be used as long as it can detect an arbitrary state in the movable member and can perform abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operation time, shape, temperature, or part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. What is necessary is just to set and enable the abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. In addition, in a drive mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) the movable member such as the operation motors 9060A to 9060C together with or in place of the state of the movable member such as the movable members 9051 to 9054. An arbitrary state can be detected and abnormality notification can be executed based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. As described above, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and perform abnormality notification based on the detection result.

  In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 41, and if it is determined in step S9059 that the origin is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S9060. It has been described as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. In addition to the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, or in place of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, for example, the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is detected by the effect control process in step S9065 shown in FIG. Based on the result, abnormality notification of the movable member may be executable. With respect to the abnormality notification during the normal operation of the movable member, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, while the production control board 9012 and the production control. When the relay board 9016A for use is in an unconnected state, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the said embodiment, it demonstrated as what can perform abnormality alert | report about the movable member for effects like the movable members 9051-9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an abnormality notification may be executed for any movable member that can operate according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the wiring for driving the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door shown in FIG. 22 may be connected to the main board 9011 via the solenoid relay board. Also, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the big winning door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. A wiring for transmitting a signal may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board are connected, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable blade piece or the big prize door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable blade piece or the big prize door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, an abnormality notification of the launch motor can be executed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor is abnormal. You may control not to alert | report.

  Furthermore, the movable member is not limited to one that can perform abnormality notification, and may be one that can perform abnormality notification for any circuit, device, or other element. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output may be possible.

  In the embodiment described above, the presence / absence of abnormality notification is changed according to the connection state between a plurality of substrates such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of abnormality notification may be changed according to the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, apparatus, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. That is, in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided, when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected, any abnormality notification can be performed. If the first connection unit and the second connection unit are in an unconnected state, any control may be performed so that abnormality notification is not performed. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output is possible when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided. On the other hand, when the first connection unit and the second connection unit are not connected, control may be performed so that no output is performed. Further, the unconnected state between the substrates and the unconnected state between the connection portions may include a state in which at least a part of wiring is connected and another part of the wiring is not connected. .

  Next, a modified example in the case of displaying the checksum calculation result and the like will be described. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, a memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is off, the process of step S90206 is not executed, so that the control result such as the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41, if the relay unconnected flag is OFF, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is executed. It may not be done. In other words, even when the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, they are stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. It may be controlled so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data is not executed, and the calculation result is not displayed accordingly. Further, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is turned on. If it is determined that the relay is not turned on, the memory checking process in step S9055 may be executed. In this case, in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like are determined in step S90206. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a connection, it may be controlled not to display the checksum calculation result or the like by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by not executing the process of calculating the checksum itself. May be controlled so as not to be displayed, or the processing for calculating the checksum may be executed but the checksum calculation result may not be displayed.

  Alternatively, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed even when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. The display form may be less recognizable than the display form in the case where both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. For example, when displaying the checksum calculation result by displaying the image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, reducing the display size of the image, increasing the transparency of the image, It suffices if the display period can be displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult to recognize the checksum calculation result by reducing the display period, reducing the number of times the image is displayed, or by combining some or all of them. As described above, both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, or one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are provided. By defining the connection status range of whether it is in an unconnected state, by defining the limit of display that does not display the checksum calculation result, or by defining the display limit of displaying in a display mode that is difficult to recognize, What is necessary is just to provide a display restriction according to the connection state.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected via the harness HN1 (via another board). It was described as being connected to the effect control board 9012. In contrast, for example, a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the presentation control board 9012 via another board such as the presentation control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, and the presentation control board 9012. Checksum calculation results and the like can be displayed when they are not connected, and checksum calculation results and the like are not displayed when some of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. You may control to. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the display unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display a checksum calculation result or the like.

  In the above embodiment, as the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. In the above description, the checksum is calculated and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method may be employed. The checksum calculation is not limited to calculating an exclusive OR for each address data, but may be an exclusive OR calculation using data at a plurality of addresses as an operation unit.

  In the embodiment described above, the check sum of the stored data is calculated for all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result may be displayed. Whether or not a checksum is to be calculated may be varied depending on the contents stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, for the effect control program and various management data stored in the first storage area of the ROM 90121, and the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, the calculation results and the like are used as checksum calculation objects. On the other hand, the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121, the audio data other than the image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A, the motor data and the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C are displayed. The checksum may not be calculated, and the calculation result may not be displayed. Depending on the condition of establishment of predetermined calculation conditions, the setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be varied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum is calculated using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are displayed. The checksum calculation using the stored data may not be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the storage data is normal for storage devices such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C that are mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store effect data used for effect execution. In the above description, it is possible to display the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. May be. For example, whether or not the stored data is normal for the ROM 90101 that is mounted on the main board 9011 and can store control data (including binary codes constituting a program module) used for controlling the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 Such a determination result may be displayed. In this case, for example, a plurality of substrates that can be connected to the main substrate 9011, such as a payout control substrate and an information terminal substrate, may be set in advance as the second substrate and the third substrate. Then, when both the second substrate and the second substrate are not connected to the main substrate 9011, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed as the main image display device 905MA. Display is possible with a display device such as, and when either one of the second substrate and the third substrate is not connected to the main substrate 9011, control is performed so that the determination result of the stored data is not displayed. Also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to determining whether the storage data of the non-volatile recording medium such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, and for example, a volatile recording medium such as the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131. It may be determined whether the stored data is normal and the determination result can be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the checksum calculation result that is the determination result of the stored data according to the connection state between the plurality of boards such as the connection board between the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the production control board 9012. It was explained as something that changes whether or not to display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the determination result of the stored data is displayed depends on the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in the configuration in which the second connection portion and the third connection portion connectable to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are in an unconnected state. The determination result by the determination process using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state. You may control not to display the determination result by determination processing. The second connection unit and the third connection unit are not limited to the display of the determination result by the determination process using the stored data, and the second connection unit and the third connection unit are provided in the configuration in which the second connection unit and the third connection unit connectable to the first connection unit are provided. When both of the first connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state, any processing result using arbitrary data can be output, and either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit May be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data.

  In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses a voltage at a connection confirmation terminal such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, or determines whether or not a command is received. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a configuration in which a connection state can be confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically using a switch or a sensor may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is to be a special gaming state such as the probability changing state, and based on the determination to be the probability changing state. In the above description, it is assumed that the probability variation control condition is satisfied and the control is performed in the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that a game ball that has won (entered) a prize winning opening (second prize winning opening) in a probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. The probability change control condition may be satisfied, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The probability winning attacker's big prize opening (second big prize opening) can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area. When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, whether or not abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 41 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. It may be configured so that at least one of the control of whether or not and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

  The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols as a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified One game is completed by displaying and displaying a display result (for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and a prize (for example, a cherry prize, a watermelon prize, a bell prize, a replay prize, a BB prize, an RB prize, etc.) is selected according to the display result. ) Can be generated. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided. That is, in the slot machine, whether or not abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 41 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. Of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed, at least one of them may be realized.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including the lighting operation can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, for example. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  As described above, in the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 41 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is OFF, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 can be executed. In this way, when the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second board such as the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being frequently executed in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, and to improve the work efficiency.

  The connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B respectively include terminals TM22 and TN22 serving as connection confirmation terminals. In step S9052 shown in FIG. 41, etc., based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. Thereby, a connection state can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

  In the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 41 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is on. In addition, the check sum calculation contents and the like are displayed by the update display in step S90206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, or if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 44A that the relay unconnected flag is off, step S90206. The update display is not performed, and the control content of the checksum is not displayed. Thus, in the configuration including the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one side and the first substrate are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling not to display the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result. As a result, for example, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporarily disconnected from the cable) while being installed in an amusement store, and the power is turned on. In the situation, the display of the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the erroneous recognition of the failure at the game shop side.

  Further, for example, the ROM 90121 shown in FIG. 24A stores audio data used for audio control, and the effect data memory 90123A shown in FIG. 24B1 stores image data used for display control. When stored, the audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A continuous from the last address of the ROM 90121. Thus, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area that is continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively used to reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition to the reduction, the control data can be read smoothly and appropriate control can be performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko game machine 9 Production | presentation display apparatus 18c Total pending | holding memory | storage display part 91 1st character image 92 2nd character image 100 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 901 Pachinko game machine 905MA Main image display apparatus 905SU Sub image display apparatus 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Ceiling LED
909b Left frame LED
909c Right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Production control relay board 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 For effect control Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A-90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Light emitter driver 90411 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminals

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display of the variable display;
A suggestion image display unit capable of displaying a suggestion image related to a change in display mode of the specific display in a region different from the display region of the specific display;
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means;
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means,
The output means is set to the second output state;
The suggestion image display means can change a display mode of the suggestion image in a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display of the variable display;
A suggestion image display unit capable of displaying a suggestion image related to a change in display mode of the specific display in a region different from the display region of the specific display;
Action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect that changes the display mode of the specific display by causing the suggestion image to act on the specific display;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means;
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided on the other board connected via the wiring member to the board on which the output means is provided,
The output means is set to the first output state;
The suggestion image display means can change a display mode of the suggestion image in a period from when the suggestion image is displayed to when the action effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.